TDV - Manual Assy Rev.3!18!09

Page 1 of 1 00
THERMAL DRAIN VALVE

COVER PAGE
SYSTEM (TDVS)
18 March Revision Number 2
Instruction Manual
Document I.D. TDV.Cover Page,00

Thermal Drain Valve System (TDVS)

Instruction Manual

Clyde Bergemann, Inc.

4015 Presidential Parkway
Atlanta, Georgia 30340-3707 USA
1-800-241-5996
Page 1 of 8 A0.1
THERMAL DRAIN VALVE
THERMAL DRAIN MANUAL
SYSTEM
18 March 2009 Revision Number 2
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Document I.D. TDV Manual.A0.1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page No.
1. Basic Description 3
2. System Overview
2.1 System Identification 3
2.2 Major Component Description 4
2.3 Operational Philosophy (Refer to TDV Drawing illustration at end of manual)
2.3.1 Stand Alone System Narrative 5
2.3.2 PLC Operated System Narrative 5
2.4 System Installation
2.4.1 Thermal Drain System 8
2.4.2 Thermal Drain Valve 8
2.4.3 Temperature Sensor 8
2.4.4 Steam Trap 8
2.4.5 Check Valve 8
2.4.6 Isolation Valves 8
2.5 Temperature Set Point 9
2.6 System Component Requirements 10
2.7 Spare Parts 10
3 Product Bulletins
3.1 Thermal Drain Valve Tab 1
3.2 Valves Tab 2
3.3 Actuator Tab 3
3.4 Temperature Switch Tab 4
3.5 Limit Switch Tab 5
Page 2 of 8 A0.2
THERMAL DRAIN VALVE
SYSTEM
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3.6 Solenoid Valve Tab 6

3.7 Trap Tab 7
3.8 Isolation (Gate) Valve Tab 8
4. Product Manuals
4.1 Valve Tab 9
4.2 Actuator Tab 10
4.3 Temperature Switch Tab 11
4.4 Solenoid Valve Tab 12
4.5 Isolation (Gate) Valves Tab 13
4.6 Rotary Valve Position Indicator Tab 14
Illustration
Thermal Drain Valve P&ID Tab 15
Page 3 of 8 A0.3
THERMAL DRAIN VALVE
SYSTEM
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Section 1 – Basic Description

The Clyde Bergemann Thermal Drain Valve (TDV) is a specially designed system used for the
removal of condensate from sootblower headers systems. We have developed a combination of
valves, temperature sensors and associated equipment to provide the best solution for removal of
water and saturated steam for optimal cleaning media.
Section 2 – System Overview

2.1 System Identification
The thermal drain valve is available in essentially four different configurations. They
would be the following:
Option Description CBI Part No.

1 PLC Operated / Flanged Valve CBA005161
2 PLC Operated / Socket Weld Valve CBA005162
3 Stand Alone Operation / Flanged Valve CBA005163
4 Stand Alone Operation / Socket Weld Valve CBA005164
Option 1
This assembly utilizes a flanged thermal drain valve assembly along with a temperature
transmitter for control of the valve through the use of a PLC.
Option 2
This assembly utilizes a socket weld end thermal drain valve assembly along with a
temperature transmitter for control of the valve through the use of a PLC.
Option 3
This assembly utilizes a flanged thermal drain valve assembly along with a temperature
switch for direct control of the valve.
Option 4
This assembly utilizes a socket weld end thermal drain valve assembly along with a
temperature switch for direct control of the valve.
Page 4 of 8 A0.4
THERMAL DRAIN VALVE
SYSTEM
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
As part of the standard scope, the thermal drain valve is also supplied with a trap to be
used as a bypass. This trap is to be used in the event that the drain valve comes down
for maintenance. However, this option may be deleted from the scope of supply and not
always supplied.
2.2 Major Components
Drain Valve – This is a metal seated ball valve that has been picked for its unique ability
to perform in this environment. As noted earlier, this valve may come with either flanged
ends or socket weld ends.
Actuator – This is a pneumatic actuator that provides the 90-degree rotation needed for
the open/close operation of the valve.
Temperature Transmitter – When the PLC controlled version of the TDV is utilized, the
temperature transmitter is used to sense the header temperature and send a signal back
to the PLC for determination (based on the set point) as to whether or not the valve should
be opened or closed. This temperature transmitter utilized a 4-20 mA signal.
Temperature Switch – When the stand-along version of the TDV is utilized, the
temperature switch is used to sense the header temperature and send the signal back to
the solenoid on the actuator. This switch is supplied with adjustable set points to control
the temperature at which the valve would open and close.
Limit Switches – The actuator is also provided with limit switches used for indication of
the open/closed status back to the PLC when this option is utilized.
Solenoid Valve – The actuator is controlled through the use of a solenoid valve. The
solenoid coil will either be energized to open the valve or de-energized to close the valve.
Trap – A trap is supplied (unless the option is not purchased) to be installed in a bypass
line around the TDV. This trap is to be utilized as a backup to the TDV.
Isolation Valves – Gate valves are supplied for installation on either side of the TDV and
Trap. Ttwo valves are to be placed on either side of the TDV and are to be opened for
Page 5 of 8 A0.5
THERMAL DRAIN VALVE
SYSTEM
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
TDV use. Two valves are to be placed on either side of the Trap and are to be normally
closed.
Check Valve – In order to prevent any condensate downsteam of the TDV from
accumulating or flowing towards the TDV, a check valve is installed downstream of the
drain valve and trap bypass.
2.3 Operational Philosophy

2.3.1 Stand Alone System
The stand-alone system utilized components that allow for the TDV to be operated
on its own without the use of a PLC. The drain valve is opened and closed based
upon a set point on a temperature switch that is located upstream of the drain
valve itself. Therefore, as long as the minimum temperature is met, the valve will
be closed. If the minimum temperature is not met, the valve will be open. This
cycling of the valve is totally independent of sootblower and control valve
operations.
2.3.2 PLC Operated System

This system utilized components that allow for the TDV to be operated from the
sootblower PLC (or DCS). The drain valve is opened and closed based upon a
temperature set point within the PLC. A temperature transmitter is installed
upstream of the drain valve. This temperature transmitter then sends a real time
signal back to the PLC. The PLC used this signal to make a determination as to
whether or not the drain valve should be opened or closed based on the set point.
The PLC would then perform the required operation by sending a signal to the
solenoid valve to either open or close the valve.
Also, since the drain valve is being operated by the PLC, it can be used in a role
that will allow for the most optimized use. Typically, the drain valve will be opened
before a sootblower sequence is begun. Once the drain valve has met the
minimum required temperature the drain valve would close and sootblowers would
then be allowed to run.
This valve is also supplied with limit switches that can be used to verify if the valve
is open or closed by linking them with the PLC.
Page 6 of 8 A0.6
THERMAL DRAIN VALVE
SYSTEM
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2.4 System Installation

Refer to P&ID drawing for system layout)
This system is made up of components t.hat have been supplied by many manufacturers.
Included in this manual are the manufacturer’s product bulletins. Utilize these bulletins
and manuals for installation of each individual component.
2.4.1 Thermal Drain System – The drain station (encompassing all components) must
be installed downstream of the last sootblower in the piping. A good rule of thumb
is to have this setup approximately 40 to 50 feet downstream of the last sootblower
or last branch off of the main header going to a sootblower.
2.4.2 Thermal Drain Valve – The drain valve itself should be installed in the main run
between the sootblower header and the condensate tank, flash tank, etc. Refer to
the product manual in Section 4.
2.4.3 Temperature Sensor – The temperature sensor, either the temperature transmitter
or the temperature switch, should be installed approximately 10 to 20 feet
downstream of the last sootblower or last branch off of the main header going to a
sootblower. Locating it in this location will ensure that the sootblower piping is at
the proper temperature. If a temperature transmitter has been supplied, the wiring
must be brought back to the PLC. Refer to product manual in Section 4.
2.4.4 Steam Trap – The steam trap is to be installed in a bypass round the Drain Valve
and its isolation valves. Refer to product bulletin in Section 3 for installation
instructions.
2.4.5 Check Valve – The check valve is to be installed downstream of the bypass. Take
care to ensure that this valve is installed correctly to allow for condensate to drain.
If installed backwards, this valve will not allow for drainage. Refer to the product
bulletin in Section 3 for installation instructions.
2.4.6 Isolation Valves – There are 4 isolation valves. They are too installed on either
side of the drain valve and the trap. The two around the drain valve are to be
normally open. The two around the trap are to be normally closed. Refer to the
product manual in Section 4 for installation instructions.
Page 7 of 8 A0.7
THERMAL DRAIN VALVE
SYSTEM
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2.5 Temperature Set Point

Utilize the following chart to determine the temperature at which the drain valve should
open and close based on header pressure. Header pressure is defined as the nominal
operating pressure for the sootblower header. For example, if the header were controlled
by a PRV, the set pressure for this PRV would be the nominal header pressure.
Header Header Saturation Saturation Valve Close Valve Close Valve Open Valve Open
Pressure Pressure Temperature Temperature Set Temp. Set Temp. Set Temp. Set Temp.
(PSIA) (Bar) (F) (C) (F) (C) (F) (C)
400 400 445 229 505 263 473 245
420 420 449 232 509 265 477 247
440 440 454 234 514 268 482 250
460 460 459 237 519 270 487 253
480 480 463 239 523 273 491 255
500 500 467 242 527 275 495 257
520 520 471 244 531 277 499 259
540 540 475 246 535 279 503 262
560 560 479 248 539 282 507 264
580 580 483 250 543 284 511 266
600 600 486 252 546 286 514 268
620 620 490 254 550 288 518 270
640 640 493 256 553 290 521 272
660 660 497 258 557 291 525 274
680 680 500 260 560 293 528 276
700 700 503 262 563 295 531 277
720 720 506 263 566 297 534 279
740 740 509 265 569 299 537 281
760 761 512 267 572 300 540 282
780 780 515 269 575 302 546 284
800 800 518 270 578 303 546 286
The “Valve Open Set Temperature” is 32 degrees below the “Valve Close Set Temperature”. This
is the 32-degree dead band for the temperature switch but should also be used for PLC set
temperatures.
Page 8 of 8 A0.8
THERMAL DRAIN VALVE
SYSTEM
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2.6 System Requirements

2.6.1 Air and Power
• Instrument Air: 80-PSI instrument air is required for operation of the pneumatic
actuator on the valve.
• Power Supply:
Temperature Transmitter 1775 VDC minimum
Temperature Switch 120 VAC
Limit Switch 120 VAC or 24 VDC
Solenoid Valve 120 VACS
2.6.2 Connection Sizes
• Drain Valve (Flanged) 1” 600# Class
• Drain Valve (S.W.E.) 1” Pipe Size
• Trap 1” NPTF
• Gate Valves 1” NPTF
• Check Valve 1” NPTF
• Air Connection to Solenoid ¼” NPT
• Temperature Transmitter Conduit ½”-14 NPT
• Temperature Switch Conduit ¾” NPT
• Solenoid Valve Conduit ¼” NPT
• Limit Switch Conduit ¼” NPT
2.7 Spare Parts

The Thermal Drain System is made up of an extremely reliable and durable set of
components. And since the TDV has a trap bypass, the onsite storage of spare parts is
not absolutely required.
This system is made up of components that have been supplied by many manufacturers.
Included in this manual are the manufacturer’s product bulletins and product manuals.
Utilize these bulletins and manuals to determine and then purchase any parts that may be
required.
If assistance is required, please contact Clyde Bergemann, Inc. at 1-800-241-5996 to
speak with someone in the project engineering department.
0
Instruction Manual
For
Thermal Drain Valve 10/1/03, Rev. 0
SECTION DIVIDER PAGE
3.1 – Thermal Drain Valve
Tab 1
Not affiliated with Copes-Vulcan Inc. Copes-

Vulcan trademark is used under license from
Copes-Vulcan
A Clyde Bergemann Reasons For a Thermal Drain
Thermal Drain Valve 1. Condensate related boiler tube
erosion
May Be The Solution! 2. Hot water blowing thru packing
area causing safety hazard
Clyde Bergemann has developed a solution to excessive 3. Trap inefficiency not removing
condensate in sootblower steam supply headers. In most condensate
cases excessive condensate is a result of inadequate 4. Frequent packing replacement
drainage resulting from a mechanical problem in the
drain valve/trap or an operational philosophy that does
as a result of excessive condensate
not adequately address the issue. We have tremendous 5. High maintenance costs associated
experience in dealing with these issues and have found with keeping traps operating
that installation of the proper equipment in conjunction with 6. Reduce steam consumption as a result
the proper operational philosophy drastically reduce the
amount of condensate in the sootblower header. of eliminating continuous blow through
as seen with traps
The most common problems that we see are header
systems that rely on steam traps or improper valves to
drain their condensate. Steam traps are notorious for
clogging up (requiring them to be cleaned on a regular
basis) or being undersized for the application. If the trap is The solution is a system that has been specifically designed
clogged or undersized you will have excessive condensate for the extreme service seen with three-phase flow along with
in the sootblower header. Drain valves are also commonly intelligence to operate properly for removal of condensate
. Clyde Bergemann, has developed such a system. Our
used. They, however, are not always the right valve for the
Thermal Drain Valve System (TDVS) is a set of valves and
application. The fact that a drain valve sees three-phase
instrumentation compiled together to eliminate condensate in
flow (water then saturated steam and finally superheated
a sootblower piping header system. The combination of these
steam) can cause these valves to leak or at a minimum devices either open or close a specially designed valve to rid
cause a maintenance headache. Also, the combination the piping of condensate based on temperature set points.
of using an improper drain valve with a philosophy that
does not lend itself to properly bleeding out condensate There are two versions of the TDVS. One is utilizing your
will cause problems. The valve has to be opened until the existing PLC or DCS to interpret input from a temperature
condensate is removed and proper temperatures have sensor as to when the drain valve should open and close.
been reached before sootblowers should be operated. The other option is a stand-alone system, which utilizes an
electronics package that mounts on the valve that interprets
input from a temperature sensor for operation of the drain
valve. There are advantages of each. The determination of
which version would be best for you should be based upon
how easy it would be to integrate a system into your existing
PLC or DCS versus using a stand-alone system.
If you have a condensate problem there are many issues that

could be causing this. However, this TDVS can cure a high
percentage of these incidences.
Engineering Studies can be completed

which provide a complete analysis of
the sootblower piping system along
with proposed corrective actions
The preferred (PLC controlled) system consist of the following
components:
1. 1 ea. - Thermal Drain Valve

2. 1 ea. - Steam Trap
3. 1 ea. – Temperature Transmitter w/ T. Well
4. 4 ea. – Isolation Valves
5. 1 ea. – Check Valve
6. Design philosophy and set points customized for your exact
conditions.
As an alternate the stand-alone system would consist of the

following components:
1. 1 ea. – Thermal Drain Valve with Electronics Package.

2. 1 ea. - Steam Trap
3. 4 ea. – Isolation Valves
4. 1 ea. – Check Valve
5. Design philosophy and set points customized for your exact
conditions.
Thermal Drain Valve System
PLC Operated Stand Alone
Item CBI Part No. Item CBI Part No.

Flanged Valve CBA005161 Flanged Valve CBA005163
Socket Weld CBA005162 Socket Weld CBA005164
Valve Valve
A P&ID has been enclosed for a more detailed description of how the PLC controlled version would look. We would also supply the
information required for proper operation and set up of the valve in order to remove your condensate properly.
Drain Valve Specifications

Size: 1”
ANSI Class: 600#
Body Material: A216 WCB
Metal Seated w/ Pneumatic Actuator
Solenoid Valve (120VAC)
Open/Closed Limit Switches
Clyde Bergemann, Inc. 4015 Presidential Parkway, Atlanta, GA 30340-3707 USA

Telephone: (770) 557-3600 Fax: (770) 557-3641 Toll Free: (800) 241-5996
1
Instruction Manual
For
3.2 – Valves
Tab 2

Copes-Vulcan
Metal Seated Ball Valves
For Power & Industrial Applications
By Union Tech
Severe Service Ball Valves
Series Z1 Unibody Power Valve

3500 & 4500 Sizes 1/2"- 4"
Class 150 - 3200
Series Z2 Two - Piece Industrial Valve
Class 150 - 2500 Sizes 1/2"- 24"
Series Z3 Three -Piece
Double Ball,
DoubleDouble
BlockBlock & Bleed
& Bleed Ball Valve
Their Options Are Our Standards

13
Manufacturer of Quality Valve
Products Around the Globe
At Global Flow Technologies, formerly Zy-Tech, we are committed to improving our

TM
clients’ operational and financial performance by supplying the most comprehensive

range of valve products in the industry through our family of trusted valve brands.
Engineering Expertise Manufacturing and
GFT utilizes the latest state Construction
of the art engineering soft- All PBV ® valves are manu-
ware to provide custom de- factured of the highest
sign services. Finite ele- quality materials with
ment analysis is one of state-of-the-art CNC ma-
many Design Verification chines to assure critical
Tools GFT uses for designing valves to specific requirements. accuracy required for high performance zero-leakage metal
seated ball valve construction. PBV ® match laps all balls
Quality Control and seat surfaces for bubble tight sealing, plus all univer-
All GFT Companies man- sal mounting brackets are machined to ISO standards.
ufacture quality products
that are designed and Compliance and Testing
tested to meet the strin- All PBV ® ball valves are
gent standards of most manufactured and tested to
Qualifying Authorities ar- comply with many interna-
ound the world. Advanced Engineering and our Quality tional qualifying authorities
Management System assure that our valve products con- as well as our own strict
tinue to exceed your expectations. quality control procedures.
Many procedures exceed
Customer Service MSS-SP61, API-598 and ANSI FCI 70.2 Class VI.
GFT’s Customer Service All testing procedures comply with ANSI B16.34 and testing
Departments are fully can be summarized as follows:
staffed with trained cus-
tomer service representa- • Hydrostatic: 1.5 x max. CWP. Zero Leakage/60 seconds.
tives ready to help you • High Press. Seat: 1.1 x max. CWP. Zero Leakage/60 seconds.
with your order informa- • Low Press. Seat: 50 psi. Zero Leakage/60 seconds.
tion, technical specifications and project logistics. • Additional, Air: 50 psi. Zero Leakage/60 seconds.
PBV® Severe Service Ball Valve Certification
Union Tech Company, Inc. meets or exceeds all requirements

for ISO 9001:2000 certification and also implements their own
stringent testing and quality assurance program requirements
to meet the exacting standards of the industry’s leading
authorities and your specific application requirements.
Contact your PBV® Union Tech representative
for more information.
Visit us at www.globalflowtech.com
Toll Free: 1.800.231.3530
Contents
Introduction & How To Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Series Z1 Unibody Power Valve • Features, Applications, Dimensional Data, Parts & Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
Series Z2 Two-Piece Industrial Valve • Features, Applications, Dimensional Data, Parts & Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 9
Series Z3 Three-Piece Double Ball, Double Block & Bleed Valve • Features & Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Series Z1 & Z2 Engineering Data • Flow Coefficient (Cv) Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
PBV® Severe Service Ball Valve Solutions
PBV ® Series Z1, Z2 & Z3 One, Two & Three-Piece Metal Seated Severe Service Ball Valves
PBV® introduces their NEW Series of Severe Service Ball When it comes to media leakage and critical isolation, now
Valves engineered for zero-leakage and critical applications. you can strike back with PBV®’s superior quality, long lasting,
low maintenance metal seated ball valve solution.
Z3 Series
Z1 Series Z2 Series Three-Piece
Unibody Two-Piece Double Ball,
High-Pressure Metal Seated Double Block & Bleed
Severe Service Ball Valve Severe Service Ball Valve Severe Service Valve
PBV® Severe Service Ball Valves • How To Order
Specifying PBV® Metal Seated Severe Service Valve Figure Numbers

Example: 2.5 x 2 Z125-2240C-99-G418 •This number represents a 2.5" NPS x 2" Bore Series Z1 One-Piece Power Valve in ANSI Class 2500,
with F22 Body Material and 410 SS Ball and Seat Material Coated with HVOF Chromium Carbide, SWE Upstream End Connection and a SWE
Downstream End Connection, equipped with Gear Operator and 4" Tall Mounting Bracket with an ISO F10 Mounting Pattern and a 36 mm Coupler.
2.5 x 2 Z1 25 - 22 40 C - 9 9 - G 4 1 8
NPS x Bore (in.) ISO 5211
Series ANSI Body Ball & Seat Ball & Seat Upstream Downstream Operator Bracket Coupler
Mounting
Z1* Z2** Class Material Material Coating End Conn. End Conn. Height Pattern Size
.75 x .65 3/4 Z1 10 5 36 C 1 1 A 4 0 6

1x1 1 1-PC 150 Class A105 316 SS HVOF Raised Face Raised Face Actuator 4" F07 22 mm
1.5 x 1.4 11/2 Power Valve 30 22 40 Chromium Flange Flange B 6 1 7
2 x 1.75 2 Z1-SB 300 Class F22 410 SS Carbide 3 3 Bare Stem 6" F10 27 mm
2.5 x 2 3 1-PC 60 91 43 T RTJ RTJ (Specify 8 2 8
3 x 2.5 4 Sootblower 600 Class F91 431 SS HVOF 5 5 Bracket & 8" F12 36 mm
4x3 6 Z2-FPU 90 36 44 Tungsten BWE BWE Mntg.Pad) 12 3 9
6 x 3.5 8 2-PC 900 Class 316 SS 431 SS Carbide (Specify (Specify G 12" F14 46 mm
8x4 10 Full Port 15 4 51 S Pipe Sched.) Pipe Sched.) Gear 16 4 K
10 x 6 12 Uni-direction. 1500 Class 304 SS F51 Duplex Stellite® 8 8 L 16" F16 Keyed
12 x 8 14 Z2-FPB 25 51 55 X NPT NPT Lever X 5 SP
16 2-PC 2500 Class F51 Duplex F55 Duplex Special 9 9 Special F25 Special
18 Full Port 32 55 71 SWE SWE
20 Bi-directional 3200 Class F55 Duplex Monel®
24 Z2-RPU 35 SP 73
2-PC 3500 Class Special Hastelloy® C
Full Port 45 74
Uni-direction. 4500 Class Inconel® 718
Z2-RPB 75
2-PC Inconel® 625
Full Port SP
Bi-directional Special
Z3
3-PC Double
Block & Bleed
*When placing orders please include NPS x Bore size before “Series” number. **Z2 Valves are available in FP and RP configurations.
3
PBV® Z1 Unibody Power Valve • Features, Applications & Dimensional Data
PBV® Z1
One-Piece metal seated ball valves for high-pressure severe service applications including Power Generation
and critical on/off applications.
• Design Meets ASME TDP-1 2006
• .65"-3" Bore Size • 150-4500 ANSI Class
Bore Requirements
• 1/2"- 4" Nominal Pipe Size • 4 Year Warranty
• Material- A105, F22, F91 and 316 SS
Scribe Line on Stem ISO Universal

to Indicate Flow Mounting Bracket
Live-Loaded Stem Packing

for Reduced Maintenance
Blowout Proof
Stem Design
In-house CNC
Pressed In Machining
Downstream Seat
Belleville (Inconel 718) Spring
HVOF Chrome Carbide Loaded Upstream Seat for
Coated Ball & Seat Constant Seat Loads
Optimized Flow Paths
One-Piece Forged
Barstock Design With Ball and Seat are Mate Lapped
A Variety of End for Zero Leakage Shutoff
Connections Available Metal-to-Metal Sealing
Dependable Performance For All of Your Power Applications

PBV®’s Series Z1 Metal Seated Severe Service Ball Valve is Union Tech offers the Z1 Severe Service Ball Valve in a variety
designed for dependable zero leakage performance in high of sizes and materials to meet your specific application require-
pressure, high temperature, clean critical steam applications. ments. Contact your PBV® Union Tech Representative today
for more information about PBV® Severe Service Ball Valves.
D End Configuration Dimensions

NOTE: From Centerline of Valve.
A A1 WE
Dimensional Data
Bore Size A1 A2 Weight
(in.) A WE B C D (Lbs)
SW
.65 5.00 4.50 3.50 2.25 5.00 13.25 25
1.00 6.00 5.00 4.00 2.75 5.50 19.25 46
1.40 8.00 6.00 5.50 3.00 5.75 19.25 66
1.75 9.50 7.25 6.25 3.25 6.00 24.00 98
2.00 12.25 8.13 6.25 4.25 7.75 NA 170
2.50 14.00 * 9.50 5.50 10.50 NA **
3.00 14.50 * 9.00 5.25 11.00 NA ** A2 SW
*Consult factory for dimensions not listed. **Consult factory for weights not listed.
4
PBV® Z1 Unibody Power Valve • Parts & Materials
13 11
10
14
15 12
17
9
8
7 6
16 19
18
3 5
21 22
1 24
20 2
25 4
24 23
Parts & Materials

Material
No. Qty. Description
A105 / LF2 A182 F22 A182 F91 A182 F316
1 1 Body A105 A182 F22 A182 F91 A182 F316
2 1 Seal Seat 410 SS / CCC 410 SS / CCC 410 SS / CCC 410 SS / CCC
3 1 Ball 410 SS / CCC 410 SS / CCC 410 SS / CCC 410 SS / CCC
4 1 Stem Collar 410 SS / QPQ 410 SS / QPQ 410 SS / QPQ 410 SS / QPQ
5 1 Stem Bearing 410 SS / QPQ 410 SS / QPQ 410 SS / QPQ 410 SS / QPQ
6 1 Gland 410 SS 410 SS 410 SS 410 SS
7 1 Gland Nut A193 - B8M A193 - B8M A193 - B8M A193- B8M
8 1 Gland Stud A194 - GR8 A194 - GR8 A194 - GR8 A194 - GR8
9 1 Live-Loaded Spring 300 SS 300 SS 300 SS 300 SS
10 1 Adapter Bushing Cast Iron Cast Iron Cast Iron Cast Iron
11 1 Shear Pin Carbon Steel Carbon Steel Carbon Steel Carbon Steel
12 1 Mounting Bracket CS ASTM A-500 CS ASTM A-500 CS ASTM A-500 CS ASTM A-500
13 1 Hand Lever Carbon Steel Carbon Steel Carbon Steel Carbon Steel
14 1 Hex Head Screw J429 GR5 J429 GR5 J429 GR5 J429 GR5
15 1 Washer Carbon Steel Carbon Steel Carbon Steel Carbon Steel
16 1 Stem A638 GR660 A638 GR660 A638 GR660 A638 GR660
17 1 Pin Carbon Steel Carbon Steel Carbon Steel Carbon Steel
18 1 Stem Packing Grafoil® Grafoil® Grafoil® Grafoil®
19 1 Stem Packing (Anti-Extrusion) Grafoil® Grafoil® Grafoil® Grafoil®
20 1 Load Pin Inconel® 718 Inconel® 718 Inconel® 718 Inconel® 718
21 1 Retaining Ring ASTM A 286 GR660 ASTM A 286 GR660 ASTM A 286 GR660 ASTM A 286 GR660
22 1 Spring Inconel® 718 Inconel® 718 Inconel® 718 Inconel® 718
23 1 Transition Spacer Carbon Steel Carbon Steel Carbon Steel Carbon Steel
24 1 Socketweld Adapter A105 A182 F22 A182 F91 A182 F316
25 1 Seat Pusher 410 SS / QPQ 410 SS / QPQ 410 SS / QPQ 410 SS / QPQ
NOTE: Trim is Inconel® 718 on Class 4500 valves.
We reserve the right to change materials and specifications.
5
PBV® Z2 Two-Piece Industrial Valve • Features, Applications & Dimensional Data (Class 150)
PBV® Z2
Two-Piece metal seated ball valves for severe service applications including Chemical, Petro-Chemical, Abrasives, etc.
• 1/2"-24" Nominal Pipe Size • Available in SW, BW, FLF, RTJ, Hub and NPT Ends
• 150-2500 ANSI Class • Materials: A-105, F-22, F-91, 316, Others Upon Request
• Standard and Full Port • Uni or Bi-directional
Live-Loaded ISO Universal

Stem Packing Mounting Bracket
Blowout Proof In-house CNC Machining

Stem Design
Ball and Seat Spring Loaded

are Field Repairable Upstream Seat
HVOF Chrome Carbide Metal-to-Metal Sealing

Coated Ball & Seat for Class VI Shut-off
Two-Piece Design Ball and Seats are

With a Variety of End Mate Lapped
Connections Available
Rugged Design For All of Your Industrial Applications

PBV®’s Series Z2 Metal Seated Severe Service Ball Valve is Union Tech offers the Z2 Severe Service Ball Valve in a variety
designed for dependable performance in critical service indus- of sizes and materials to meet your specific application require-
trial applications including Oil & Gas Refining, Petroleum & ments. Contact your PBV® Union Tech Representative today
Petro Chemical production and many others. for more information about PBV® Severe Service Ball Valves.
Class 150 Dimensional Data

Size
A B ØC ØD G K
(in.)
1/2 4.25 2.00 0.50 3.50 2.75 2.38
G 3/4 4.62 2.38 0.75 3.88 3.00 2.50
1 5.00 2.63 1.00 4.25 4.88 3.00
1 1/2 6.50 2.88 1.50 5.00 5.25 3.13
øD øC 2 7.00 3.25 2.00 6.00 6.00 3.38
3 8.00 4.00 3.00 7.50 7.00 4.50
K 4 9.00 3.75 4.00 9.00 8.25 5.00
6 15.50 7.50 6.00 11.00 11.50 7.75
8 18.00 9.25 8.00 13.50 15.00 9.50
10 21.00 10.75 10.00 16.00 17.75 11.50
B 12 24.00 12.00 12.00 19.00 19.00 12.25
14 27.00 13.50 13.25 21.00 21.50 14.50
A
16 30.00 15.00 15.25 23.50 22.00 15.50
18 34.00 17.00 17.25 25.00 30.00 17.50
20 36.00 18.00 19.25 27.50 34.00 21.00
24 42.00 22.00 23.25 32.00 40.00 25.00
NOTE: Z2 Sizes are estimated.
Contact factory for verification when ordering.
6
PBV® Z2 Two-Piece Industrial Valve • Dimensional Data (Class 300, 600, 900, 1500 & 2500)
Class 300 Dimensional Data

Size
A B ØC ØD G K
(in.)
1/2 5.50 2.25 0.50 3.75 2.75 2.38
G 3/4 6.00 2.50 0.75 4.62 3.00 2.50
1 6.50 2.75 1.00 4.88 4.88 3.00
1 1/2 7.50 3.00 1.50 6.12 5.25 3.13
øD øC 2 8.50 3.75 2.00 6.50 6.00 3.38
3 11.12 4.75 3.00 8.25 7.00 4.50
K 4 12.00 5.38 4.00 10.00 8.25 5.00
6 15.88 7.75 6.00 12.50 11.50 7.75
8 19.75 9.25 8.00 15.00 15.00 9.50
10 22.38 12.00 10.00 17.50 17.75 11.50
B 12 25.50 13.00 12.00 20.50 19.00 12.25
14 30.00 16.00 13.25 23.00 21.50 15.25
A
16 33.00 16.50 15.25 25.50 24.50 15.50
18 36.00 18.00 17.00 28.00 30.00 17.50
20 39.00 20.00 19.00 30.50 37.00 21.00
24 45.00 23.00 23.00 36.00 42.00 25.00
Class 600 Dimensional Data Class 900 Dimensional Data

Size Size
A B ØC ØD G K A B ØC ØD G K
(in.) (in.)
1/2 6.50 2.75 0.50 3.75 2.75 2.38 1/2 9.00 4.50 0.50 4.75 2.75 3.00
3/4 7.50 3.50 0.75 4.62 3.00 2.50 3/4 9.00 4.50 0.69 5.12 3.00 3.00
1 8.50 4.25 1.00 4.88 3.00 3.00 1 10.00 5.00 0.87 5.88 4.88 3.00
1 1/2 9.50 4.75 1.50 6.12 5.25 3.50 1 1/2 12.00 6.00 1.37 7.00 5.25 4.31
2 11.50 5.00 2.00 6.50 6.00 3.75 2 14.50 6.50 1.87 8.50 6.00 4.50
3 14.00 6.00 3.00 8.25 7.00 4.75 3 15.00 7.00 2.87 9.50 7.00 5.00
4 17.00 7.75 4.00 10.75 8.25 5.00 4 18.00 7.50 3.87 11.50 8.25 6.75
6 22.00 9.00 6.00 14.00 11.50 8.00 6 24.00 9.50 5.75 15.00 11.50 9.00
8 26.00 12.25 7.87 16.50 15.88 10.25 8 29.00 14.00 7.50 18.50 15.00 11.50
10 31.00 14.00 9.75 20.00 18.00 11.50 10 33.00 16.00 9.37 21.50 17.75 13.75
12 33.00 16.00 11.75 22.00 20.00 12.25 12 38.00 18.00 11.12 24.00 19.00 15.50
14 35.00 17.50 12.87 23.75 24.00 16.00
16 39.00 20.25 14.75 27.00 26.00 16.00
18 43.00 22.50 16.50 29.25 32.00 18.00
20 47.00 23.75 18.25 32.00 38.00 21.00
24 55.00 28.00 22.00 37.00 44.00 25.00
Class 1500 Dimensional Data Class 2500 Dimensional Data

Size Size
A B ØC ØD G K A B ØC ØD G K
(in.) (in.)
1/2 9.00 4.50 0.50 4.75 4.75 3.00 1/2 9.00 4.50 0.44 5.25 4.75 3.00
3/4 9.00 4.50 0.69 5.12 4.75 3.00 3/4 9.00 4.50 0.56 5.50 4.75 3.00
1 10.00 5.00 0.87 5.88 4.75 3.00 1 10.00 5.00 0.75 6.25 4.75 3.00
1 1/2 12.00 6.00 1.37 7.00 7.50 3.50 1 1/2 12.00 6.00 1.12 8.00 7.00 4.50
2 14.50 6.50 1.87 8.50 8.25 4.38 2 17.75 7.25 1.50 9.25 9.00 6.00
3 18.50 8.50 2.75 10.50 9.50 5.50 3 22.75 10.00 2.25 12.00 11.75 8.50
4 21.50 9.75 3.62 12.25 12.13 7.25 4 26.50 11.00 2.87 14.00 13.25 7.50
6 27.75 11.00 5.37 15.50 17.50 10.00 6 36.00 13.00 4.37 19.00 15.00 11.00
8 32.75 14.00 7.00 19.00 20.00 12.50 8 40.25 14.50 5.75 21.75 24.00 13.00
10 39.00 16.00 8.75 23.00 21.00 15.50 10 50.00 19.00 7.25 26.50 26.00 13.50
12 44.50 19.00 10.37 26.50 24.00 14.00 12 56.00 22.00 8.62 30.00 28.00 18.50
NOTE: Z2 Sizes are estimated. Contact factory for verification when
ordering. Sizes 14"- 24" are available upon request.
7
PBV® Z2 Two-Piece Industrial Valve • Parts & Materials
12
18 13
17
11
Adapter
16 Pin
15
14 10
19
9
21 5
2
7 22
1
4
2
3
6
8
Parts & Materials

Material
No. Qty. Description
A105 / LF2 A182 F22 A182 F91 A182 F316
1 1 Body A105 A182 F22 A182 F91 A182 F316
2 2 Seal Seat 410 SS / CCC 410 SS / CCC 410 SS / CCC 410 SS / CCC
3 1 Ball 410 SS / CCC 410 SS / CCC 410 SS / CCC 410 SS / CCC
4 1 Stem A638 GR660 A638 GR660 A638 GR660 A638 GR660
5 1 Stem Bearing 410 SS / QPQ 410 SS / QPQ 410 SS / QPQ 410 SS / QPQ
6 1 End Connection A105 A105 A105 A105
7 1 Body Nut ASTM A194- GR2H ASTM A194- GR4H ASTM A194- GR4H ASTM A194- GR8
8 1 Body Stud ASTM A193 - B7 ASTM A193 - B16 ASTM A193 - B16 ASTM A193- B8
9 1 Stem Packing Grafoil® Grafoil® Grafoil® Grafoil®
10 1 Gland Flange 410 SS 410 SS 410 SS 410 SS
11 1 Stem Adapter 4140 HT 4140 HT 4140 HT 4140 HT
12 1 Adapter Bushing Cast Iron Cast Iron Cast Iron Cast Iron
13 1 Mounting Bracket CS ASTM A-500 CS ASTM A-500 CS ASTM A-500 CS ASTM A-500
14 1 Gland Stud A193 - B8M A193 - B8M A193 - B8M A193- B8M
15 1 Gland Nut A194 - GR8 A194 - GR8 A194 - GR8 A194 - GR8
16 1 Gland Lock Washer 300 SS 300 SS 300 SS 300 SS
17 1 Bracket Bolts A574 GR5 A574 GR5 A574 GR5 A574 GR5
18 1 Bracket Lock Washer Carbon Steel Carbon Steel Carbon Steel Carbon Steel
19 1 Stem Packing (Anti-Extrusion) Grafoil® Grafoil® Grafoil® Grafoil®
21 1 Spring Inconel® 718 Inconel® 718 Inconel® 718 Inconel® 718
22 1 Body Gasket 316 /Grafoil® Filled 316 /Grafoil® Filled 316 /Grafoil® Filled 316 /Grafoil® Filled
NOTE: We reserve the right to change materials and specifications.
8
PBV® Z3 Three-Piece Double Ball, Double Block & Bleed Valve • Features & Applications
PBV® Z3
Three-Piece metal seated double block and bleed ball valves for severe service applications.
• .65"-3" Bore Size • Available in SW, BW, FLG and NPT Ends
• 1/2"- 4" Nominal Pipe Size • Materials: A-105, F-22, F-91, 316 and others upon request
• 150-1500 ANSI Class
ISO Universal Mounting Standard Handle for Manual

Bracket for Actuation Valve Operation
Live-Loaded Stem Packing Variety of End Connection

for Reduced Maintenance Options Available
Blowout Proof Mate Lapped Ball and

Stem Design Seats for Optimum Sealing
Belleville (Inconel® 718) Spring Loaded Carbon Steel, Stainless Steel or Exotic Alloy
Upstream Seat for Constant Seat Loads Body and Trim Materials
Metal-to-Metal Sealing for Zero Leakage Bleed Off Between the Upstream and
Downstream Seals is Accomplished
with a Drain Between the Ports
Double Block & Bleed Valves Maintain Upstream
and Downstream Sealing Under Pressure
Z1 Drain Valve Available
Differentials or Balanced Conditions
Rugged Design For All of Your Industrial Applications

PBV®’s Series Z3 Double Block & Bleed Metal Seated Severe Union Tech offers the Z3 Double Block & Bleed Metal Seated
Service Ball Valve is designed for dependable performance Severe Service Ball Valve in a variety of sizes and materials to
including Clean Critical Service, Oil & Gas Refining, meet your specific application requirements. Contact your
Petroleum & Petro Chemical Production and many others. PBV® Union Tech Representative today for more information
With two isolation points for zero leakage, the Z3 is designed about Series Z3 Ball Valves.
to maintain upstream and downstream sealing under pres-
sure differentials or balanced conditions.
9
PBV® Z1 Unibody Power Valve & Z2 Two-Piece Industrial Valve • Engineering Data
The Cv for valves indicates the flow capacity of the valve. minute at 60˚ F that will flow through a given element with
Cv by definition is the volume of water in gallons per a pressure drop of 1 psig.
Series Z1 • Flow Coefficients (Cv)

Bore Size (in.) / Pipe Schedule
Valve Size .65 1.00 1.40 1.75 2.00 2.50 3.05
80 160 80 160 80 160 80 160 80 160 80 160 80 160
1/2 22 22 — — — — — — — — — — — —
3/4 32 40 — — — — — — — — — — — —
1 31 26 103 74 — — — — — — — — — —
1 1/2 15 16 48 56 155 212 — — — — — — — —
2 14 15 40 46 105 135 264 375 466 347 — — — —
2 1/2 — — 36 37 86 94 170 208 304 400 — — — —
3 — — 28 29 75 80 135 150 202 234 481 655 — —
4 — — — — 56 58 115 120 160 172 296 342 588 785
NOTE: For other pipe sizes not in the chart, contact factory.
Series Z2 • Flow Coefficients (Cv)

Flow Coefficients (Cv) Rating
Valve Size (in.)
Cl. 150 Cl. 300 Cl. 600 Cl. 900 Cl. 1500 Cl. 2500
1/2 26 26 26 26 26 20
3/4 62 62 62 52 52 33
1 x 11/2 8 8 8 9 9 10
1 114 114 114 84 84 61
11/2 x 1 40 40 40 45 45 70
11/2 270 270 270 223 223 145
2 x 11/2 105 105 105 120 120 270
2 500 500 500 432 432 270
3x2 159 159 159 168 177 286
3 1175 1175 1175 1070 978 640
4x3 427 427 427 454 528 640
4 2160 2160 2160 2013 1748 1070
6x4 787 787 787 830 916 1515
6 5076 5076 5076 4641 4018 2602
8x6 1724 1724 2161 2376 2815 —
8 9300 9300 8985 8120 7022 4641
10 x 8 4250 4250 4502 4992 6246 6622
10 14,865 14,865 14,095 12,966 11,228 7560
12 x 10 7348 7348 7776 9268 12,411 —
12 21,799 21,799 20,857 18,578 16,044 10,880
14 x 12 13,793 13,793 15,502 19,581 — —
16 x 14 19,916 19,916 23,040 30,125 — —
18 x 16 23,588 25,508 30,887 39,857 — —
20 x 18 36,010 38,269 47,203 — — —
24 x 20 32,665 33,972 39,620 48,573 — —
NOTE: I.D. of valve size is based on ASME B16.34 Annex A. Please contact factory for additional valve sizes.
10
Notes
11
PBV General Terms and Conditions of Sale
By acceptance of the goods described herein, the Purchaser expressly acknowledges and agrees as follows:
1. Warranty: The warranty described below applies only to new or unused goods or goods reconditioned by Global FlowTM Technologies (Seller). The Seller specifically disclaims any warranty for
used goods or goods sold as is. For a period of one (1) year after date of purchase of any of the goods described herein, Seller warrants such goods shall remain free from failure due to defects
in workmanship and materials incorporated therein by or for Seller provided such failure shall not have been caused or contributed to by improper usage, service or application, improper instal-
lation or maintenance, repairs, alterations, or modifications effected by or for the user, misuse, negligence or accident. In the event of failure for which Seller has assumed warranty obligations
hereunder, and provided written notification of such failure shall be immediately given to Seller, it agrees to repair, or at its option, to replace the goods sold at its sold expense. Apart from the
warranty and undertaking above set forth, or unless otherwise specifically consented to in writing by Seller, Seller assumes no obligation or liability for losses, expense or damages, direct or
consequential, suffered or incurred as a result of any failure of, or defect in, the goods described herein, including but not limited to, such costs, expenses or damages as may result of any
failure of, or defect in, the goods described herein, including but not limited to, such costs, expenses or damages as may result from the necessity to remove, replace, restore or transport the
goods from any location or service in which they may be used, regardless of the cause of such failure or defect. This warranty extends only to the original Purchaser of the goods and is the only
warranty made by Seller in connection therewith. There are no other warranties, express or implied, of any kind given with respect to the goods, their merchantability, fitness for any particular
purpose or usage, or otherwise, nor is any person authorized to extend on behalf of Seller any form of warranty other than that above set forth. The goods described herein are not sold or dis-
tributed by Seller for personal, family or household purposes, nor are they normally suited for use as such.
2. Prices: Prices and other terms of sale where set forth in current price sheets are subject to change without notice. Stenographic or clerical errors are subject to correction.
3. Acceptance of Orders and Special Orders: All orders are subject to acceptance by Seller at its home office, Stafford, Texas, only. No assignment of the Purchaser’s rights may be made with-
out the written consent of the Seller. Orders for special materials are subject to cancellation only upon agreement to make payment for the work performed, material used, and a reasonable
profit.
4. Terms, Payment and Partial Shipment: All accounts are payable net 30 days of invoice date. One percent (1%) per month interest charged on accounts after 30 days, or twelve percent
(12%) annually. All accounts are payable in United States dollars, free of exchange, collection, or any other charges. If in the sole discretion of Seller, the financial condition of the Purchaser
at any time so requires, Seller retains the right to require full or partial payment in advance, to set spending limits for credit accounts or to require other adequate assurances of financial respon-
sibility. Seller reserves the right to make partial shipments from time to time and render invoices therefore, which shall be due and payable as provided in said invoices.
5. Freight Charges: Unless otherwise specifically noted, standard shipping charges (calculated by product weight, not including packaging) shall be added or be in addition to the price quot-
ed and Purchaser agrees to pay the same to Seller.
6. Taxes: Unless otherwise specifically noted, the amount of any sales, use, occupancy, excise tax, or other tax, of any nature, federal, state, or local, for which Seller is legally liable, either ini-
tially or through failure of payment by Purchaser, shall be added or be in addition to the price quoted and Purchaser agrees to pay the same to Seller.
7. Unavoidable Conditions: Seller shall not be liable for failure to deliver or delays in delivery occasioned by causes beyond its control, including, without limitation, strikes, lockouts, fires,
embargoes, war or other outbreaks of hostilities, acts of God, inability to obtain shipping space, machinery, breakdowns, delays of carriers or suppliers, and governmental acts or regulations.
8. Returns and Cancellations: No product may be returned without Seller’s prior written consent. All goods returned are subject to a handling charge plus freight in both directions, restocking
fees and charges for any required reconditioning, unless otherwise specified in writing by Seller. Overages, shortages and incorrect material claims must be made in writing within ten (10) days
of receipt of goods. Cancellation of orders once placed with and accepted by Seller may be made only with its written consent.
9. No Waiver: Seller’s failure to insist upon any of the terms, covenants, or conditions listed herein or to exercise any right hereunder shall not be construed as a waiver or relinquishment of
the future performances of any such term, covenant or condition, or the future exercise of such right or a waiver or relinquishment or waiver of any other term, covenant or condition or the exer-
cise of any other rights hereunder.
10. Drawings, Data and Confidential Information: The weights, dimensions, capacities, prices, performance ratings and other data included in catalogues, prospectuses, circulars, advertise-
ments, illustrated matter and price lists constitute a guide. These data shall not be binding except to the extent that they are by reference expressly included in the purchase order. Any draw-
ings or technical documents intended for use in the manufacture of machinery, equipment, plants, parts, or other material and any ancillary services associated therewith (Material), or a part
thereof, and submitted to the Purchaser prior or subsequent to the formation of the purchase order, remain the exclusive property of the Seller. They shall not, without the Seller’s consent, be
utilized by the Purchaser or copied, reproduced, transmitted or communicated to an unauthorized third party, provided, however, that the said plans and documents shall be the property of the
Purchaser if it is expressly so agreed in writing. Any drawings or technical documents intended for use in the construction of the Material or of part thereof and submitted to the Seller by the
Purchaser prior or subsequent to the formation of the purchase order remain the exclusive property of the Purchaser. They shall not, without Purchaser's consent in writing, be utilized by the
Seller or copied, reproduced, transmitted or communicated to an unauthorized third party.
11. Governing Law: This contract shall be governed by, construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of Texas.
12. Totality of Agreement, Special Provisions, Modifications: This instrument constitutes the entire agreement of the parties with respect to all matters and things herein mentioned. Purchaser
warrants, represents and agrees that it has inspected the goods and otherwise made inquiry and review, upon its own behalf, concerning the nature, characteristics and quality of the materials
and workmanship incorporated therein at or prior to delivery, that it is fully contented and satisfied therewith and has independently determined that the goods are in all respects fit and usable
for all purposes for which they are intended to be employed by Purchaser. It is expressly acknowledged and agreed by and between the parties that neither party has, nor is now, relying upon
any collateral, prior or contemporaneous agreement, written or oral, assurance or assurances, representation or warranty, of any kind or nature as to or respecting the condition or capabilities
of the goods and the other matters and things, rights and responsibilities herein fixed and described. No modification, waiver or discharge of any term or provision of this instrument shall be
implied by law, nor shall any alteration, modification or acquittance of any such term or provision be effective for any purpose unless in writing signed by or upon behalf of the party charged
therewith.
(1) Returns are accepted within 180 days of shipment. Restocking charges for returned standard materials is 15%. Cancellation of orders for standard materials prior to shipment may incur a
10% minimum cancellation charge. Cancellation of non-standard material may incur up to 100% cancellation charge depending on stage of work in progress. All material returned to Global
FlowTM Technologies must be accompanied by a prior written Returned Goods Authorization (RGA) form and freight must be prepaid. All material is subject to inspection and final disposition
by Global FlowTM Technologies quality department. A clean up and or re-certification charge may apply to any returned materials. Special items, buyouts, and modified products are non-return-
able. (2) All products are subject to prior sales. (3) All sales are subject to Global FlowTM Technologies standard Terms & Conditions.
13. Export Regulations: GFT products can only be exported in accordance with U.S. Export Administration Regulations and other U.S. legal requirements. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited.
Represented By:
12735 Dairy Ashford Road

Stafford, Texas 77477
281.340.5400
Toll Free: 800.256.6193
Fax: 281.340.5499
www.globalflowtech.com
©2008 Global FlowTM Technologies • PBV®, Inc. is a wholly-owned subsidiary of Global FlowTM Technologies • PBV ® is a registered trademark of Global FlowTM Technologies
Grafoil® is a registered Trademark of Union Carbide Corporation • Inconel® is a registered Trademark of Special Metals Corporation, USA • Hastelloy® is a registered Trademark
of Haynes International, Inc. • Stellite® is a registered Trademark of Stoody Deloro Stellite, Inc. • PBV_Z1-Z2-Z3_SEVERE_SRVC_BV_1108
2
Instruction Manual
For
3.3 – Actuator
Tab 3

Copes-Vulcan
17
19
TECHNICAL 22
8
INFORMATION 21
16
9
27
26
4
25
20
13
14 28
1
Wear Parts are identified

15 by solid circles.
15
20
23
11
4
21
9
16
7
WEIGHT IN POUNDS
22 12 MODEL 90˚ 120˚ 180˚ K6
8
18 M 10 1.00 -— — 1.20
24
17 19 M 20 1.98 2.20 2.65 2.20
M 30 2.98 3.26 3.97 3.42
M 52 4.30 4.74 5.95 5.07
M-SERIES MATERIALS M 73
M 103
5.51
7.39
5.95
8.16
7.94
11.25
6.39
8.38
POS. QTY. DESCRIPTION MATERIAL M 148 10.58 11.47 13.56 12.79

1 1 BODY ANODIZED ALUMINUM M 222 14.99 16.90 20.68 17.86
POLYESTER EPOXY COATING
M 295 18.74 20.73 26.02 22.49
4 2 PISTON** DIE CAST ALUMINUM M 470 31.00 — — 39.80
7 1 PINION E.N.P. ASTM B656 STEEL M 586 34.40 39.69 55.79 42.78
M 900 61.50 — — 83.10
8 2 END CAP** EPOXY COATED ALUMINUM
M 1213 68.80 81.14 106.94 86.66
9 MAX 12 SPRING CARTRIDGE EPOXY COATED STEEL
DELRIN / BRASS M 2366 132.32 146.63 173.60 180.81
M 2958 160.97 177.60 — 209.48
11 1 UPPER PINION BEARING DELRIN 500
M 3720 205.00 — — 267.00
12 1 LOWER PINION BEARING DELRIN 500
13 1 CIRCLIP E.N.P. ASTM B656 STEEL
14 1 PINION WASHER DELRIN 500 AIR CONSUMPTION

CUBIC INCHES PER CYCLE (Open/Close)
15 2 PISTON SKATE DELRIN 500
16 2 PISTON GUIDE RING DELRIN 500 MODEL 90˚ 120˚ 180˚ K6

M 10 12.8 — — 6.7
17 2 SEALING NUT 304 Stainless Steel
M 20 15.3 17.1 28.1 7.3
18 2 TRAVEL STOP 304 Stainless Steel
M 30 22.0 24.4 41.5 9.2
19 2 TRAVEL STOP O-RING BUNA N M 52 36.6 42.7 68.3 15.3
20 8 END CAP SCREW 304 Stainless Steel M 73 52.5 61.0 99.5 22.0
M 103 67.1 82.4 131.2 27.5
21 2 PISTON O-RING BUNA N
M 148 112.9 137.3 189.2 41.5
22 2 END CAP O-RING BUNA N
M 222 152.6 176.9 341.7 67.1
23 1 UPPER PINION O-RING BUNA N M 295 218.5 241.0 415.0 86.7
24 1 LOWER PINION O-RING BUNA N M 470 335.6 — — 174.5
25 1 DLS STOP BOLT 304 STAINLESS STEEL M 586 416.2 476.0 790.2 174.5
M 900 762.8 — — 396.7
26 1 DLS STOP BOLT O RING VITON
M 1213 872.6 1013.0 1293.7 360.0
27 1 DLS STOP BOLT BEARING TEFLON
M 2366 1586.6 1861.2 2471.5 701.8
28 1 DLS STOP BOLT CIRCLIP E.N.P. ASTM M 2958 1922.2 2288.4 — 1037.4
B656 STEEL
M 3720 2955.0 — — 1594.0
** M10 - M20 utilize polyrilamide materials

2
Unitorq Pneumatic Actuator Torque Chart
The Following Torque Values Are in IN.-LB. And Represent Air Stroke For The Spring Return Unit.
PSI 40 60 80 100 120 ALL 40 60 80 100 120

D O U B L E A C T I N G TO R Q U E SPRING AIR AIR AIR AIR AIR
TO R Q U E C U R V E S & VA LU E S
in lbs. K# Start End End Start End Start End Start End Start End Start
50 75 100 125 150 2 56 56 — 11 18 35 42 60 67 85 92 110
M10
— — — — — 3 83 83 — — — 16 15 40 40 65 65 90
102 152 203 254 305 2 56 38 44 62 94 112 144 162 194 212 244 262
— — — — — 3 83 57 15 42 65 92 115 142 165 192 215 242
M20 — — — — — 4 111 76 — 22 36 72 86 122 136 172 186 222
— — — — — 5 139 95 — 2 6 52 56 102 106 152 156 202
— — — — — 6 167 114 — — — 31 26 81 76 132 126 182
151 227 302 378 453 2 80 56 69 93 144 168 218 242 293 317 367 391
— — — — — 3 119 83 30 66 104 140 179 215 253 289 328 364
M30 — — — — — 4 159 111 — 38 64 112 139 187 213 261 288 336
— — — — — 5 199 139 — 10 24 84 99 159 173 233 248 308
— — — — — 6 239 167 — — — 56 59 131 133 206 208 280
263 395 526 658 789 2 154 104 105 155 235 285 365 415 494 545 624 675
— — — — — 3 232 156 28 103 158 233 287 363 417 493 547 623
M52 — — — — — 4 309 208 — 51 80 181 210 311 340 441 469 570
— — — — — 5 386 260 — — 3 129 132 259 262 388 392 518
— — — — — 6 463 312 — — — 76 55 206 185 336 314 466
367 551 734 918 1101 2 199 127 163 235 344 417 525 598 706 779 887 960
— — — — — 3 299 190 63 172 244 353 426 534 607 715 788 896
M73 — — — — — 4 398 253 — 108 145 290 326 471 507 652 688 833
— — — — — 5 498 317 — 45 45 226 226 407 407 588 588 769
— — — — — 6 597 380 — — — 162 126 343 307 524 488 706
516 774 1032 1290 1548 2 267 189 241 318 495 572 749 826 1002 1080 1256 1334
— — — — — 3 400 284 107 223 361 477 615 731 869 985 1123 1239
M103 — — — — — 4 533 379 — 128 227 382 481 636 735 890 989 1144
— — — — — 5 667 473 — 33 93 287 347 541 601 795 855 1049
— — — — — 6 800 568 — — — 192 213 446 467 700 721 954
740 1109 1479 1849 2219 2 407 260 321 468 685 832 1049 1196 1413 1560 1777 1924
— — — — — 3 611 391 117 337 481 701 845 1065 1209 1429 1573 1793
M148 — — — — — 4 814 521 — 207 277 571 641 935 1005 1299 1369 1663
— — — — — 5 1018 651 — 76 73 440 437 804 801 1168 1165 1532
— — — — — 6 1221 781 — — — 309 232 673 596 1037 960 1401
1109 1664 2218 2773 3327 2 550 400 489 645 1018 1174 1548 1704 2077 2233 2607 2763
— — — — — 3 826 600 188 426 718 956 1247 1485 1777 2015 2307 2544
M222 — — — — — 4 1101 800 — 200 407 729 936 1259 1466 1789 1995 2318
— — — — — 5 1376 1000 — — 84 495 614 1025 1144 1554 1673 2084
— — — — — 6 1651 1200 — — — 253 281 783 810 1312 1340 1842
1479 2219 2958 3698 4437 2 814 516 641 939 1369 814 2097 2395 2825 3123 3552 3850
— — — — — 3 1222 775 234 681 962 1222 1689 2137 2417 2864 3145 3592
M295 — — — — — 4 1629 1033 — 423 554 1629 1282 1878 2010 2606 2738 3334
— — — — — 5 2036 1291 — 164 147 2036 874 1620 1602 2348 2330 3075
— — — — — 6 2443 1549 — — — 2443 467 1361 1195 2089 1922 2817
2071 3106 4142 5177 6213 2 1133 681 938 1390 1974 2425 3009 3461 4045 4496 5080 5532
— — — — — 3 1699 1022 371 1049 1407 2084 2443 3120 3478 4155 4514 5191
M470 — — — — — 4 2266 1363 — 708 840 1743 1876 2779 2911 3841 3947 4850
— — — — — 5 2832 1704 — 367 273 1402 1309 2438 2344 3473 3380 4509
— — — — — 6 3398 2044 — 26 — 1061 742 2097 1777 3132 2813 4168
2933 4399 5865 7331 8798 2 1542 1052 1344 1834 2787 3277 4320 4720 5673 6163 7117 7606
— — — — — 3 2312 1578 573 1308 2016 2751 3459 4194 4902 5637 6345 7080
M586 — — — — — 4 3083 2104 — 781 1245 2224 2688 3667 4131 5111 5574 6554
— — — — — 5 3854 2630 — 255 473 1698 1916 3141 3359 4584 4802 6027
— — — — — 6 4625 3156 — — — 1171 1145 2614 2588 4058 4031 5501
4550 6825 9100 11375 13650 2 2251 1619 2227 2859 4466 5098 6705 7337 8944 9576 11183 11815
— — — — — 3 3376 2428 1101 2049 3340 4288 5579 6527 7818 8766 10057 11005
M900 — — — — — 4 4501 3238 — 1239 2214 3478 4453 5717 6692 7956 8931 10195
— — — — — 5 5627 4047 — 429 1088 2668 3327 4907 5566 7146 7805 9385
— — — — — 6 6752 4856 — — — 1858 2200 4097 4439 6336 6678 8575
6066 9099 12132 15165 18198 2 3000 2159 2969 3811 5954 6796 8939 9781 11924 12766 14910 15751
— — — — — 3 4501 3238 1468 2731 4453 5716 7438 8701 10424 11686 13409 14672
M1213 — — — — — 4 6001 4317 — 1651 2952 4636 5937 7621 8922 10606 11907 13591
— — — — — 5 7501 5397 — 571 1451 3556 4436 6541 7421 9526 10406 12511
— — — — — 6 9001 6476 — — — 2475 2934 5460 5919 8446 8904 11431
11833 17749 23665 29581 35498 2 6832 4573 4812 7072 10635 12895 16457 18718 22280 24540 28103 30363
— — — — — 3 10249 6859 1394 4785 7217 10607 13040 16430 18862 22253 24685 28076
M 2366 — — — — — 4 13665 9145 — 2497 3798 8319 9621 14142 15444 19965 21267 25788
— — — — — 5 17081 11432 — 208 379 6031 6202 11854 12025 17677 17847 23499
— — — — — 6 20497 13718 — — — 3742 2782 9565 8605 15388 14427 21210
14790 22186 29581 29581 44371 2 8540 5015 6015 9541 13293 16819 20571 24097 27850 31376 35128 38654
— — — — — 3 12811 7523 1742 7032 9021 14310 16299 21589 23577 28867 30856 36145
M 2958 — — — — — 4 17081 10030 — 4523 4748 11801 12026 19079 19304 26358 26583 33636
— — — — — 5 21351 12538 — 2013 474 9291 7752 16570 15030 23848 22309 31126
— — — — — 6 25621 15045 — — — 6781 3477 14059 10755 21338 18034 28616
18625 27938 37250 37250 55875 2 8148 5119 11098 14127 20721 23750 30345 33374 39968 42997 49592 52621
— — — — — 3 12222 7679 7022 11566 16645 21189 26269 30813 35892 40436 45516 50060
— — — — — 4 16296 10239 2945 9004 12568 18628 22192 28251 31816 37875 44139 47498
M 3720 — — — — — 5 20370 12799 — 6442 8491 16066 18114 25689 27738 35313 37362 44936
— — — — — 6 24443 15358 — 3880 4413 13503 14036 23127 23660 32750 33283 42374
— — — — — 7 28517 17918 — 1317 333 10940 9957 20564 19580 30187 29204 39811
— — — — — 8 32591 20478 — — — 8377 5877 18000 15500 27624 25124 37247
NOTE: Torques listed in the above table are exact. When sizing an actuator for a valve, first increase the valve torque required by 20%, as a safety factor.
3
E
BOTTOM VIEW
▲
M5X8 A
3.15 in
5.12 in*
B 1.181[30
TOP
MOUNT D
* M586 and larger OUTPUT
SHAFT
1.18 in
#10 - 32
.3 DP 4 PL
NAMUR ST
C
Model A FO B FO C* D* E F G H I L L1 ★ M N P Q R S
M 10 1.65 F04 1.42 F03 #10 - 32 #10 - 32 9 or 11MM 0.55 2.02 2.54 0.35 4.33 — 0.48 — 2.60 3.50 1/4 .94
M 20 1.97 F05 1.42 F03 1/4 - 20 #10 - 32 14MM 0.71 1.97 2.32 0.39 5.00 7.52 0.47 0.79 2.91 3.82 1/4 .94
M 30 2.76 F07 1.97 F05 5/16 - 18 1/4 - 20 14MM 0.71 2.36 2.76 0.39 5.24 7.99 0.47 0.79 3.46 4.37 1/4 .94
M 52 2.76 F07 1.97 F05 5/16 - 18 1/4 - 20 17MM 0.75 2.56 3.27 0.39 6.10 9.29 0.55 1.02 3.94 4.84 1/4 .94
M 73 2.76 F07 1.97 F05 5/16 - 18 1/4 - 20 17MM 0.75 2.56 3.58 0.39 6.97 10.63 0.55 1.02 4.25 4.95 1/4 .94
M 103 2.76 F07 1.97 F05 5/16 - 18 1/4 - 20 17MM 0.75 2.76 3.94 0.55 7.99 12.36 0.79 1.38 4.61 5.55 1/4 .94
M 148 4.02 F10 2.76 F07 3/8 - 16 5/16 - 18 22MM 0.96 3.54 4.72 0.55 8.50 12.72 0.79 1.97 5.51 6.45 1/4 .94
M 222 4.02 F10 2.76 F07 3/8 - 16 5/16 - 18 22MM 0.96 3.54 4.72 0.79 11.18 16.85 1.10 1.97 5.51 6.71 1/4 .94
M 295 4.02 F10 2.76 F07 3/8 - 16 5/16 - 18 22MM 0.98 4.06 5.39 0.79 11.42 17.76 1.10 1.97 6.30 7.51 1/4 .94
M 470 4.92 F12 4.02 F10 1/2 - 13 3/8 - 16 27MM 1.07 4.33 6.77 0.79 13.27 — 1.10 2.36 7.80 9.70 1/4 .94
M 586 4.92 F12 4.02 F10 1/2 - 13 3/8 - 16 27MM 1.07 4.33 6.77 1.10 14.49 22.36 1.42 2.36 7.80 9.70 1/4 .94
M 900 6.50 F16 4.92 F12 3/4 - 10 1/2 - 13 36MM 1.57 5.31 8.82 1.26 16.62 — 1.42 2.84 10.00 11.77 1/4 .94
M 1213 5.51 F14 — — 5/8 - 11 — 36MM 1.57 5.31 8.82 1.26 17.72 27.24 1.57 2.95 10.00 11.77 1/4 .94
M 2366 6.50 F16 — — 3/4 - 10 — 46MM 1.57 6.26 10.71 1.26 23.07 35.63 1.57 3.54 11.89 13.66 1/4 .94
M 2958 6.50 F16 — — 3/4 - 10 — 46MM 1.53 6.26 10.71 1.26 23.07 — 1.57 3.54 11.89 13.66 1/4 .94
M 3720 6.50 F16 — — 3/4 - 10 — 46MM 1.61 6.30 14.17 1.26 26.89 — 1.58 2.96 14.17 15.94 1/2 1.97
Top mounting dimensions for accessories to Namur standard. Bottom mounting is to DIN-ISO standards.
Solenoid mounting to Namur specifications is available on all units and is standard on units 148 and higher.
* U.N.C. bolt sizes.
L1★ - 180˚ end-to-end dimensions
0.16 M
0.47
SIDE VIEW N
I
R M6 Q
F
P
OUTPUT SHAFT G
X-SECTION
H
L END VIEW
4
.157[4]
ØPD PF
#10 - 32 M6 x 10 DP
.3 DP 5 PLCS / NAMUR STD. .157[4]
M10, M148-M2958
PBH
D
1.181[30]
1.260[32]
BH
3.15[80] M10 - M295
5.12[130] 1/4
I
#10 - 32 M470 - M3720
.3 DP 4 PLCS NPT
NAMUR STD.
.945[24]
L
M
ØPB
NH DRIVE DIMENSIONS
ISO SQUARE 8 - POINT
SIZE
A mm A in. A' øB øC C' øD D'
M10 9 0.354 0.55 0.673 0.85 0.09 — —
H M10 11 0.433 0.55 0.673 0.85 0.09 — —
PH M20 14 0.551 0.92
0.61 0.713 0.08 0.60 0.71
E
M30 14 0.669 0.61 0.713 0.92 0.08 0.60 0.71
M52 17 0.669 0.63 0.874 1.13 0.08 0.73 0.81
M73 17 0.669 0.63 0.874 1.25 0.08 0.73 0.81
M103 17 0.669 0.63 0.874 1.45 0.08 0.73 1.14
M148 22 0.866 0.81 1.122 1.57 0.10 0.94 1.03
B M222 22 0.866 0.81 1.122 2.07 0.10 0.94 1.26
W
N
M295 22 0.866 0.83 1.122 2.07 0.12 0.94 1.30
M470 27 1.063 0.83 1.437 2.59 0.12 1.15 1.69
M586 27 1.063 0.83 1.437 2.59 0.12 1.15 1.69
MOUNTING
DIMENSIONS M900 30 1.417 1.26 1.909 3.10 0.16 1.56 2.17
M1213 36 1.417 1.26 1.909 3.10 0.16 1.56 2.17
ISO
SIZE M2366 46 1.811 1.26 2.441 4.12 0.16 2.00 2.13
X Y Z
M2958 46 1.811 1.22 2.441 5.12 0.12 2.00 2.09
M10 F03 — —
S
M3270 48 1.811 1.26 2.441 5.12 0.12 2.00 2.13
M10 — F04* —
M20 F03 F05 —
M30 F05 F07 —
M52 F05 F07 —
M73 F05 F07 —
M103 F05 F07 —
I
M148 F07 F10 —
øD
M222 F07 F10 —
M295 F07 F10 F12
M470 — F10 F12
M586 — F10 F12
M900
M1213
M2366
—
—
—
F12
—
—
F16'
F14
F16
A' AA D'
O
M2958 — — F16
M3270 — —
øC C'
F16
ISO MOUNTING PATTERN TABLE

N
A
Q ISO øB.C. øB.C. THREAD DP
in. mm
F03 1.417 36 #10 - 32UNC 0.43
P
F04* 1.654 42 #10 - 32UNC 0.43
F05 1.969 50 1/4 - 20UNC 0.35
øB F07 2.758 70 5/16 - 16UNC 0.47

F10 4.016 102 3/8 - 16UNC 0.59
S
F12 4.921 125 1/2 - 13UNC 0.71

F14 5.512 140 5/8 - 11UNC 0.94
F16 6.496 165 3/4 - 10UNC 1.18
MTG PIN X ' M900 has 5/8" - 11UNC on F16

' M3720 also includes a 4.59 x 12.87 rectangular pattern
MTG PIN Y
W * Alternate Bottom Plate (M10 Only)
MTG PIN Z
5
3
Instruction Manual
For
3.4 – Temperature Switch
Tab 4

Copes-Vulcan
Electromechanical
Temperature Switches
Form 220
The SOR® Electromechanical

Temperature Switch
utilizes a vapor-pressure thermal system. Fluid vapor pressure changes
predictably according to the influence of temperature on the sensing
bulb. Process temperature changes cause proportional vapor pressure
changes in the temperature sensing bulb that act on the diaphragm/
piston assembly to actuate and deactuate a snap-action
electrical switching element at discrete process
temperatures. The instrument’s behavior is
determined by the vapor pressure principle.
Application Information
Basic models with direct and six-foot remote
temperature bulbs can be specified from the
quick selection guide on page 5.
More specific application

requirements can be met by
selecting optional components,
such as housings and electrical
switching elements,
from the balance
of the catalog.
www.sorinc.com Form 220

www.sorinc.com
Phone 913-888-2630 Registered Quality System to ISO 9001 Phone 913-888-2630
/28
Electromechanical
Temperature Switches Features
Vapor Pressure Principle Remote Mount Sensing Bulbs

Features and Benefits
 Device’s behavior is predictable and  316SS capillary tube with 300 Series SS
in accordance with the vapor pressure armor allows instrument to be panel

principle. mounted and bulb to be remotely located.
 Minimal ambient temperature influence,  Standard 300 Series SS armor protects

fast response, high repeatability, narrow capillary.
dead band.
Snap-Action Electrical Switching Element
Vapor Fill Fluid  Long life, high load capacity, high ambient
 Excellent chemical and thermal temperature limit, insensitive to vibration,

stability, predictable temperature-vapor SPDT or DPDT switching action,
pressure curve, nonflammable, low optional “hermetically sealed” capsule
toxicity. for hazardous locations and hostile
environments.
Direct Immersion Temperature
Sensing Bulbs Agency Listings/Certification
 316SS can withstand 2300 psig  Select models with UL, CSA, ATEX, SAA.
(1000 psig on 105 range) without

Factory Calibration
thermowell; faster response time;
 FREE! Calibrated to customer’s Set
lower cost.
Point, ready to install.
Warranty
 3 years from the date of manufacture.
Form 220 www.sorinc.com

/28 Registered Quality System to ISO 9001 Phone 913-888-2630
Electromechanical
Temperature Switches Principle
How the SOR Temperature Switch Works

The SOR temperature switch consists of a pressure switch that has a sealed temperature sensing
bulb attached directly to the pressure port. (An optional remote temperature sensing bulb can be
connected to the pressure port with an armor-clad capillary.) The temperature sensing system
is partially filled with a fluid. Process temperature changes cause proportional vapor pressure
changes in the temperature sensing bulb that act on the diaphragm/piston assembly to actuate
and deactuate a snap-action electrical switching element at discrete process temperatures. The
instrument’s behavior is determined by the vapor pressure principle. (The 105 range unit is similar,
except the fill fluid is inert gas.)
Dual (Hi-Lo)
SOR temperature switches in this catalog may be specified with two Set Points. The two Set Points
may be set at either the same actuation point or split up to full scale with no interaction between
Set Points. The Dual Hi-Lo is available with hermetically sealed, explosion proof, UL Listed and CSA
Certified electrical switching elements or with a wide selection of UL Listed and CSA Certified
snap-action switching elements for both AC and DC service. The housing selection must be V1 or
V2. See page 8.
Switching Element
Temperature Set Point Temperature Range Scale

Adjusting Nut
Housing
Piston Assembly
Range Spring
Welded Diaphragm System
Fluid/Vapor
Armored Capillary
Temperature Sensing Bulb

Phone 913-888-2630 Registered Quality System to ISO 9001 /28
Electromechanical
Temperature Switches How to Order
Model Number System
201 AH-EF 125-U9 -C7A-TT

Temperature Housing Switching Adjustable Diaphragm Pressure Port Accessories
Bulb Type Element Range System
Quick Selection Guide

Basic SOR temperature switches with standard parts are normally suitable for a variety of
industrial applications. Refer to the Quick Selection Guide section on page 5. Corrosive service
and particular customer requirements may require optional components. Refer to the How to
Order section on this page or the dedicated page to locate optional components, such as:
housings, switching elements, and accessories. Each position in the model number, except
Accessories, must have a designator.
Applications
SOR temperature switches in this catalog are suitable for a wide variety of process and fluid
power applications. Specific application requirements can normally be met by selecting optional
components, such as switching elements. Certain applications may require customized specials.
Consult area representative or the factory.
Weathertight, conventional explosion-proof and hermetically sealed, explosion-proof models are
presented in this catalog.
How to Order
Steps 1 through 4 are required; steps 5 and 6 are optional. Orders must have complete model
numbers, i.e. each component must have a designator.
Step 1: Determine if direct or remote (and capillary length) sensing is required. Select
temperature sensing bulb designator from specifications (page 6).
Step 2: Determine the adjustable range required. Select range designator, from specifications
(page 7).
Step 3: Select housing for type of service (pages 8 and 9). Note: Diaphragm designator is U9
in all cases except when a BH or BG housing is selected, then use U8 as diaphragm
designator.
Step 4: Select switching element for housing and electrical service (page 10).
Step 5: Select accessories as required for service (page 12).
Step 6: Determine if Thermowell is required. Select from tables on page 13 and order as a
separate item.
If Agency Listed, Certified or Approved temperature switches are required, see page 14 for
components that must be specified.

Electromechanical
Temperature Switches Quick Selection Guide
Class II, Groups E, F & G; Divisions 1 & 2

Explosion Proof Class I, Groups C & D;
Class I, Groups A, B, C & D; Class II,

Explosion-Proof Switching Element
Groups E, F & G; Divisions 1 & 2

Weathertight, NEMA 4, 4X, IP65
Contains Hermetically Sealed

Weathertight-NEMA 4, 4X, IP65 Explosion Proof-conventional Explosion Proof-hermetically sealed
(Direct Mount Shown) (Direct Mount Shown) (Direct Mount Shown)
Direct Mount Temperature Switches

SPDT Form “C” Contacts
Maximum Process Pressure 2300 psi
Electrical
Adjustable Overrange Typical Dead
Rating Model Number
Range Temperature Band
@250VAC
201NN-K115-U9-C7A l
150 to 375oF 520oF 15 amps 2.2oF 1.2oC
201L-K115-U9-C7A l
66 to 190oC 270oC
5 amps 6.6 F
o
3.7 C
o
201AH-EF115-U9-C7A l
201NN-K125-U9-C7A l
40 to 225oF 360oF 15 amps 1.2oF 0.7oC
201L-K125-U9-C7A l
5 to 107oC 182oC
5 amps 3.6 F
o
2.0 C
o
201NN-K135-U9-C7A l
-50 to 70oF 190oF 15 amps 1.4oF 0.8oC
201L-K135-U9-C7A l
-45 to 21oC 88oC
5 amps 4.2 F
o
2.3 C
o
Remote Mount Temperature Switches with 6’ capillary
(not shown)
SPDT Form “C” Contacts
Maximum Process Pressure 2300 psi
Electrical
Adjustable Overrange Typical Dead
Rating Model Number
Range Temperature Band
@250VAC
203NN-K115-U9-C7A l
150 to 375oF 520oF 2.2oF 1.2oC
15 amps 203L-K115-U9-C7A l
66 to 190oC 270oC
3.3 F
o
1.8 C
o
203BA-KB115-U9-C7A l
203NN-K125-U9-C7A l
40 to 225oF 360oF 1.2oF 0.7oC
15 amps 203L-K125-U9-C7A l
5 to 107oC 182oC
1.8 F
o
1.0 C
o
203NN-K135-U9-C7A l
-50 to 70oF 190oF 1.4oF 0.8oC
15 amps 203L-K135-U9-C7A l
-45 to 21oC 88oC
2.1 F
o
1.2 C
o
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice. For latest revision,
see www.sorinc.com.

Electromechanical
Temperature Switches Glossary of Terms
SOR recognizes that there is not an industry convention with respect to terminology and definitions pertinent
to temperature switches. The following list applies to SOR Temperature Switches.
Temperature Switch Maximum Process Pressure

A bi-stable electromechanical device that actuates/ The maximum process pressure to which the
deactuates one or more electrical switching temperature sensing bulb should be exposed without
element(s) at a predetermined discrete temperature being protected by a thermowell.
(Set Point) upon rising or falling temperature.
Repeatability
Adjustable Range The ability of a temperature switch to successively
The span of temperature between upper and lower operate at a set point that is approached from a
limits within which the temperature switch can be starting point in the same direction and returns to the
adjusted to actuate/deactuate. It is expressed for starting point over consecutive cycles to establish a
increasing temperature. temperature profile. The closeness of the measured
set point values is normally expressed as percentage
Set Point of full scale (maximum adjustable range temperature.)
That discrete temperature at which the temperature
switch is adjusted to actuate/deactuate on rising or Repeatability is 1% of full scale for ranges 135, 125
falling temperature. It must fall within the adjustable and 115. Range 105 has a repeatability of 2% of full
range and be called out as increasing or decreasing scale.
temperature.
SPDT Switching Element
Dead Band
Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT) has three
The difference in temperature between the increas- connections: C-Common, NO-Normally Open and
ing set point and decreasing set point. It is expressed NC-Normally Closed, which allows the switch to be
as “typical,” which is an average with the increasing electrically connected to the circuit in either NO or
set point at mid-adjustable range with the standard K NC state.
switch element. It is normally fixed (not adjustable).
Hermetically Sealed DPDT Switching Element

A welded steel capsule with glass-to-metal, factory- DPDT is two synchronized SPDT switching elements
sealed electrical leads that isolates the electrical which actuate together at increasing set point and
switching element(s) from the environment. deactuate together at decreasing set point. Discrete
SPDT switching elements allow two independent
Overrange circuits to be switched; i.e., one AC and one DC.
Overrange temperature is that temperature to which
the sensing bulb can be continuously exposed The synchronization linkage is factory set, and is
without causing permanent change of set point or not field adjustable. Synchronization is verified by
distortion sufficient to cause leakage or significant connecting test lamps to the switching elements and
degradation of the fill fluid. Temperatures greater observing them go “On” simultaneously at actuation
than overrange could cause permanent damage and and “Off” simultaneously at deactuation.
render the device inoperative.

Electromechanical Step 1: Sensing
Temperature Switches Bulb Designator
201ah-ef125-u9-c7a-tt
Temperature Bulb Type
Capillary Length
Designator Mounting Configuration Process Connection
feet meters
201 Direct - -
203 6.0 1.8
205 10.0 3.0 1/2” NPT(M)
Remote
207 15.0 4.5
209 20.0 6.0
Notes
1. For applications where a special length capillary 2. Special bulb dimensions are available. Contact
system is required, contact the factory or your the factory for details.
local representative for specifications and
delivery.

Electromechanical
Temperature Switches Step 2: Range Designator
Adjustable Ranges
Adjustable Range Overrange Maximum Process
Typical Dead Band
Designator Increasing Temperature Temperature Pressure
°F °C °F °C °F °C psi bar
135 -50 to 70 -45 to 21 1.4 0.8 190 88 23001 158
125 40 to 225 5 to 107 1.2 0.7 360* 182* 23001 158
115 150 to 375 66 to 190 2.2 1.2 520 270 2300 1
158
105**2 300 to 1000 150 to 540 15 8.3 1100 590 1000 70
* Overrange temperature decreases to 250oF (120oC) when NB option is specified. See accessories on
page 12.
** Remote mount only.
1
Overrange is reduced to 1150 psi when the CV accessory is selected.
2
The 105 model is not allowed when the CV accessory is selected.
Dead Band Considerations
1. Dead band values are expressed as typical

Switching Element Designators Multiplier
expected at mid-range using the standard K
switching element. When optional switching K, KA, W 1.0
elements are specified, corresponding dead D, E, J, JR, KB, M, Y 1.5
band multipliers must be applied to the BD 2.5
typical dead band values shown in the table A, AD, B, EF, G 3.0
whenever optional switching elements other
L, JF, YY 3.5
than K, KA or W are used.
AF, EE 4.0
2. Dead bands are fixed, except when T or H
switching elements are used. G, EB, JJ, S 5.0
3. Dead band can be widened by selecting an EG 5.5
optional switching element with a multiplier AA, BB, GG, JB, JG KK 6.0
greater than 1.0. LL 6.5
Example: Model 201NN-G125-U9-C7A
AG 8.5
Typical standard dead band: 1.2°F
Switching Element G multiplier: 3 T 2.5 to 6.5
Corrected typical dead band: 1.2°(3) = 3.6°F H 1.0 to 3.0

Electromechanical
Temperature Switches Step 3: Housing
General Purpose NEMA 1

Electrical: 3/4” NPT(F) - Right Electrical: 3/4” NPT(F) - Left, Electrical: Exposed contacts
Material: Aluminum Right Material: Aluminum
See Agency Listings page 14 Material: Aluminum Open bracket with exposed switching
See Switching Element Groups 1, See Switching Element Groups element - does not meet NEMA 1
2, 3 & 4 on page 9.
PP P3 1, 2, 3 & 4 on page 9. H3 See Switching Element Groups 1 & 3 on
page 9.
Weathertight NEMA 4, 4X, IP65

Electrical: 3/4” NPT(F) - Right Electrical: 3/4” NPT(F) - Left, Electrical: 3/4” NPT(F) - Right
Material: Aluminum Right Material: Aluminum
See Agency Listings page 14 Material: Aluminum Cover: Heavy Duty with Viton gasket
See Switching Element Groups 1, See Agency Listings page 14 See Switching Element Groups 1, 2, 3 &
NN 2, 3 & 4 on page 9. N3 See Switching Element Groups N4 4 on page 9.
1, 2, 3 & 4 on page 9.
Electrical: 3/4” NPT(F) - Right Electrical- RN: Electrical- RT: 3/4” NPT(F) - Right
Material: Carbon Steel 3/4” NPT(F) - Right Electrical- RS: M20 x 1.5 - Right
Electrical- RM: M20 x 1.5- Standard terminal block
See Switching Element Right Material: 316SS
Groups 1 & 3 on page 9. Standard terminal block See Agency Listings page 14
N6 RN RT
Material: Aluminum RS See Switching Element Groups
RM See Agency Listings page 14 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5 on page 9.
See Switching Element Groups
1, 2, 3, 4 & 5 on page 9.
Electrical: 3/4” NPT(F) - Top Electrical: 90o conduit block Electrical: 3/4” NPT(F) - Right
Standard terminal block 1/2” NPT(M) Manual reset only
Material: Aluminum 18” free wire leads Standard terminal block
See Agency Listings page 14 Material: Series 2000 Material: Aluminum
See Switching Element Groups 1, 3 Aluminum See Agency Listings page 14
*V1 & 4 on page 9.
AC Switching Element AD only. RB See Switching Element Group 7 on page 9.
Hazardous Locations: Hermetically Sealed Switching Element

Contains UL Listed and CSA Certified ATEX Certified Contains UL Listed and CSA Certified
hermetically sealed switching element. (EEx d IIC T6 & T5) hermetically sealed switching elements.
Electrical: 1/2” NPT(M) - Top Electrical: 1/2” NPT(M) - Top Electrical: 3/4” NPT(F) - Top
Material: Copper-free** aluminum Material: Aluminum
Material: Copper-free** aluminum See Switching Element Group 5 on
See Switching Element Group 5 on See Agency Listings page 14
page 9.
AG page 9. BG See Switching Element Group 5 on
page 9.
*V2
Contains UL Listed and CSA Certified ATEX Certified Contains UL Listed and CSA Certified
hermetically sealed switching element. (EEx d IIC T6 & T5) hermetically sealed switching elements.
Electrical: 1/2” NPT(M) - Top Electrical: 1/2” NPT(M) - Top Electrical: 3/4” NPT(F) - Top
Material: 316SS Material: 316SS Material: Copper-free** aluminum
See Switching Element Group 5 on See Agency Listings page 14 Weathertight: NEMA 4/4X
See Switching Element Group 6 on
AH page 9. BH See Switching Element Group 5 on
page 9.
*BA page 9.
* Not recommended for direct mount where vibration is expected. Housing should be securely mounted to a flat
surface (bulkhead or panel rack) or pipe stanchion.
** Consult the factory.

Electromechanical
Temperature Switches Step 3: Housing
Hazardous Locations: Conventional Explosion Proof

UL Listed Class I, Groups C & D; UL Listed Class I, Groups C & D; Separate electrical and Set Point
Class II, Groups E, F & G; Divisions Class II, Groups E, F & G; Divisions 1 adjustment compartments
1 & 2 as an outlet box only & 2 as an outlet box only Weathertight
Electrical: 3/4” NPT(F) - Right Electrical: 3/4” NPT(F) - Right Standard terminal block
Material: Cast Iron Material: Copper-free**aluminum UL Listed with WV option see page 14
*L Weathertight with Option CG *LC Weathertight
See Switching Element Groups 1, 2,
ATEX with CL option see page 14
See Switching Element Groups 1 CSA Certified with CS option see
& 3 below. 3 & 4 below.
page 14
UL Listed Class I, Groups C & D; UL Listed Class I, Groups C & D;
Class II, Groups E, F, & G; Divisions Class II, Groups E, F & G; Divisions
1 & 2 as an outlet box only 1 & 2 as an outlet box only *B3 Electrical: 3/4” NPT(F) - Left, Right
Electrical: 3/4” NPT(F) - Left, Right, Material: Aluminum
Electrical: 3/4” NPT(F) - Left, Right,
Top Top
*S Material: Cast Iron *SC Material: Copper-free**aluminum
Weathertight with Option CG Weathertight
See Switching Element Groups 1, See Switching Element Groups *B4 Electrical: M20 x 1.5 - Left, Right
Material: Aluminum
3, & 7 below. 1, 2, 3, 4 & 7 below.
Class 1, Groups A, B, C, D;
Electrical: M20 x 1.5 - Left, Right
Class II, Groups E, F, & G, Divisions *B5 Material: Cast Iron
1 & 2 as an outlet box only
Electrical 3/4” NPT(F) - Left, Right,
Top Electrical: 3/4” NPT(F) - Left, Right
*TA Material (Housing): Cast Iron *B6 Material: Cast Iron
Material (Cover): Aluminum
Line Mounted. Weathertight with
Option CG.
See Switching Element Groups 1 Switching Element Groups 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5 below.
& 3 below.
* Not recommended for direct mount where vibration is expected. Housing should be securely mounted to a flat surface
(bulkhead or panel rack) or pipe stanchion.
** Consult the factory.
Switching Element Group / Housing Compatibility

Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7
A, AA, B, BB, BD*,
GG, KK, AF, AG, EF, EG, EB, JB, JR,
C*, E, EE, G, J, JJ, K, T H D, M
LL, YY JF, JG KB
KA, L, S, W, Y
*BD only available with RN & RT housings *C micro switch is not available in L, S and TA housings

10/28 Registered Quality System to ISO 9001 Phone 913-888-2630
Electromechanical Step 4: Switching
Temperature Switches Element
Cross reference compatibility chart on page 9 to ensure that switching element will fit in housing.
Switching Electrical Electrical Dead Band
AC Rating DC Rating Resistive Designator
Element Contact Connection Multiplier
Service Type Type Volts Amps Volts Amps Volts Amps SPDT DPDT SPDT DPDT
Normal
250 15 125 0.4* 30 5.0* 1.0 6.0 K KK
Service AC
Low Power 125 1 - - 28 1.0* 1.0 - KA N/A

Gold Contacts 125 1 - - 30 1.0 1.5 5.0 J JJ
Wide Dead Band AC 250 15 125 0.5 - - 3.0 6.0 G GG
Double Switching Element DPDT -(2) SPDT Synchronized actuation/deactuation at increasing/decreasing Set Points
AC or DC 250 11 125 0.5* 30 5.0 3.0 6.0 A AA

All other Switching Elements - 18” 18 AWG Color-Coded Wire Leads except when terminal blocks are specified.
Wide Dead Band DC 250 15 125 0.5 30 10.0* 3.5 6.5 L LL

Narrow Dead
250 5 125 0.5* 30 5.0* 1.5 4.0 E EE
Band DC
250 5 125 0.3 - - 3.0 6.0 B BB
Hi-Ambient
Temperature 250 5 125 0.5* - - 1.5 3.5 Y YY
Rating - 400°F
250 5 125 0.3 - - 1.0 - W N/A
Potted Wire Leads
1/12” NPT(M) 250 11 125 0.5* 30 5.0 3.0 - AD N/A
Condition Connection
Wide Adjustable Dead 2.5 to
250 15 125 0.4* - - - T N/A
Band 6.5
Narrow Adjustable
250 15 - - - - 1 to 3 - H N/A
Dead Band
Manual Reset -
K, KA, G, L, C, N, S, Y, W Switching Elements - Screw Terminals.
Decreasing Temperature
D N/A
(Automatic Actuation-
Increasing Temperature)
Manual Reset - 250 15 125 0.5 - - 1.5 -
Increasing Temperature
T & H Switching Elements - Consult the factory.
(Automatic Actuation- M N/A

Decreasing
Single Switching Element SPDT - (1) SPDT
Temperature)
Corrosion 250 15 125 0.4* 30 5.0* 1.5 - KB N/A
Resistant Explosion- 250 5 125 0.5* 30 5.0* - 5.0 N/A EB
Proof Hermetically
Sealed Switching 250 11 125 0.5* 30 5.0 4.0 8.5 AF AG
Element 250 5 125 0.5* 30 5.0 3.0 5.5 EF EG
Corrosion Resistant, 125 1 - - 28 1.0* 1.5 - JR N/A
Explosion-Proof, Lower-
125 1 - - 30 1.0 - 6.0 N/A JB
Power Service
Hermetically Sealed
125 1 - - 30 1.0 3.5 6.0 JF JG
Gold Contacts
Explosion-Proof EEx d
250 7 250 0.25 30 7.0 2.5 - BD N/A
IIC T6

Phone 913-888-2630 Registered Quality System to ISO 9001 11/28
Electromechanical Step 4: Switching
Temperature Switches Element
Notes
1. Double switching elements have wire leads 5. Switching Elements W & Y have Elgiloy
except when supplied in housings RN, RT, springs.
RB, B3, B4, B5, B6 and V1. Terminal blocks 6. Certain switching elements can handle
are standard in these housings. greater voltage and/or amperage. Consult
2. Dead band multipliers must be applied to the the factory should your requirements
typical dead band figures given in the exceed catalog values. All switching
specification tables on page 7. elements above except BD are UL Listed
3. Switching element ambient temperature and CSA Certified. The DC current ratings
limits: marked with an asterisk (*) are not UL Listed
-65 to 400 F (-54 to 200 C) B, Y, W
o o
but have been verified by testing and/or
-65 to 250oF (-54 to 120oC) A, E & J experience.
-40 to 167oF (-40 to 75oC) AF, AG, 7. Cross reference compatibility chart at the
EB, EF, EG, bottom of page 9 to ensure that switching
JB, JF, JG, element will fit in housing.
JR, KB
-13 to 158oF (-25 to 70oC) BD
-65 to 180oF (-54 to 80oC) All others
4. The hermetically sealed switching element
capsule is UL Listed, CSA Certified and
SAA Approved as an explosion proof snap
switch according to the table with conditions
and exceptions specified in Note 3.
Hazardous Location
Agency Designator
Conditions
UL Listed Class I, Groups A, B C AF, EF, AG, EG,
CSA & D; Class II, Groups E, KB, EB, JB, JF,
Certified F & G; Divisions 1 & 2 JG, JR
EX s IIC T6 IP65 Class
SAA AF, EF, AG, EG,
I, Zone 1
Approved KB, EB
DIP T6 IP65

Electromechanical
Temperature Switches Step 5: Accessories
Accessory/Option & Description Designator

Neoprene cover gasket (o-ring) to make L, S and TA explosion-proof housings weathertight. CG
Required when B3, B4, B5, and B6 housings are specified for ATEX temperature switch. CL
CSA Certified pressure switch. Available with PP, NN, RB, RN, RT, B3, B6 & V1. Housing has earth (ground) lug. CS
Canadian Registration Number (CRN) - Process ratings may be affected. Consult the factory for details. CV
Cemented cover gasket on weathertight housings. GC
Sealed electrical lead adapter. Provides protection to housing interior, switching element and dry side of pressure sensing
GG
assembly from condensate in electrical conduit and corrosive atmospheres. (Protrudes approximate 2” from housing.)
Universal terminal box. Stainless steel. 1/2” NPT(F). ATEX Certified EEx d IIC T4, T5 & T6. HB
Universal terminal box. Stainless steel. M20 x 1.5(F). ATEX Certified EEx d IIC T4, T5 & T6. HBME
Universal terminal box. Stainless steel. 1/2” NPT(F). FM Approved and CSA Certified Explosion-proof Class I, Groups A,
HT
B, C, & D; Class II, Groups E, F, & G, Class III; Divisions 1 & 2 (NEMA 4X IP65)
Crouse Hinds ECD-15 for Hazardous Locations Class I, Groups C & D; Class II, Groups E, F & G;
Breather Drain on S or SC housings only. KK
Sintered metal plug in weathertight housing.
Terminal block. 6-place compression type standard in B and R series housings. Optional in LC and SC housings. Not
LL
available with all housings. Consult the factory.
Special construction to minimize the effect of across ambient temperature changes. Available on Ranges 135 and 125
NB
only. Reduces overranges to 250°F (120°C) on Range 125.
Compliance to NACE Certification MR-01 1-75. NC
Pipe (stanchion) mounting kit for (1-1/2 to 2” pipe). Order as a separate line item for UL Listed and CSA Certified
PK
temperature switches.
Tag, fiber. Attached with plastic wire to housing. Stamped with customer-specified tagging information. PP
Tag, stainless steel. Attached with stainless steel wire to housing. Stamped with customer-specified tagging information.
RR
(2 lines, 18 characters and spaces per line.)
Explosion-proof and weathertight electrical junction box with screw terminals 3/4” NPT(F) top or right conduit
connections as required. UL Listed and CSA Certified Class I, Groups A, B, C & D; Class II, Groups E, F & G; TB
Divisions 1 & 2, (AG, AH, BA, L, LC, S, SC & TA housings). Includes cover o-ring for weathertight applications.
Factory set and potted to prevent future adjustment. This option results in permanent Set point. Available only on housing
TP
AC, AG, AH, BG and BH.
Oversize stainless steel nameplate or separate stainless steel tag. Permanently attached to housing. Stamped with
TT
customer-specified tagging information.
Fungicidal varnish. Covers exterior and interior except working parts. VV
Required when B3 or B6 housing is specified for UL Listed temperature switch. WV
Powder coat epoxy coating. No coating on 316SS parts or plated screws. (500 hours-salt spray) PY
Epoxy coating. Exterior only. Polyamide epoxy with 316SS pigment. (200 hours-salt spray) YY
Chained cover with captive screws to conform to former JIC specification. ZZ
“X” is used as a suffix to the model number for special requirements. Each “X” must by completely identified in the text
of the order or inquiry. When more than one “X” is required, use “X” followed by the number of such items. For example, X
“X3” means three separate otherwise unidentifiable requirements.

Electromechanical
Temperature Switches Step 6: Thermowell
1. Determine insertion length from specification table.

2. Specify thermowell for either direct or remote mounted temperature switches from specifications
tables.
3. Specify process connection threading from specification table below.
4. The thermowell must be ordered as a separate item. Thermowells are 316SS (347SS on
275TW-NF100). Consult the SOR representative in your area or the factory for special material.
5. Special sensing bulb diameter and lengths are available. Consult the SOR representative in your
area or the factory to discuss your requirements.
Specifications and Dimensions

U Insertion A Element B Bore Process Maximum
Thermowell Available Sensing Bulb(s)
Mounting Length Length Diameter Connection Process
Model Number
201 203 205 207 209 mm in. mm in. mm in. in NPT(M) Pressure
245 TW-DM 075 u 3/4

Direct 114.3 4.5 152.6 6 10.4 0.41
245 TW-DM 100 u 1
245 TW-RM 075 u u 3/4 6200 psi
Remote 114.3 4.5 152.6 6 10.4 0.41
245 TW-RM 100 u u 1 @ 500°F
275 TW-RM 075 u u u u 3/4

Remote 190.5 7.5 228.5 9 10.4 0.41
275 TW-RM 100 u u u u 1
4700 psi
*275 TW-NF 100 u u u u Remote 190.5 7.5 228.5 9 16.8 0.66 1
@ 1000°F
*Model 275TW-NF100 must be used with Range 105.
Model 245/275TW-DM/RM Model 275TW-NF100
44.5 44.5
U Insertion Length 1.75 U Insertion Length
19.1 1.75 19.1 25.4
25.4 0.75
0.75 1.00 1.00 B Bore ∅
B Bore ∅
∅19.1 ∅26.9
0.75 1.06
Process Connection Process Connection

6.4 A Element Length 6.4
1/2” NPT A Element Length 1/2” NPT 0.25
0.25

Electromechanical
Temperature Switches Agency Listings
CSA For Hazardous Locations Class I, Groups B, C, & D; Class II, Groups E, F, & G
Process
Bulb Range Housing Switching Element Diaphragm Accessories
Connection
A, AA, B, BB, C, E, EE,
G, GG, H, J, JJ, JL, K,
KK, KA, L, LL, N, NN, S, C7A
201, 203, 105, 115, CS Required.
T, W, Y, YY Standard
205, 207, 125, 135, B3, B6 U8, U9 All except
Others as
209, 20X 1X5 Maximum: KK, LL, ZZ
Required
15A @ 300 VAC
10A @ 125 VDC
General Purpose and Weathertight (CSA Type 4)

Process
Connection
FP
(General A, AA, B, BB, C, E, EE,
Purpose) G, GG, H, J, JJ, JL, K,
KK, KA, L, LL, S, T, W,
NN Y, YY
(Type 4)
A, AA, AF, AGT, B, BB,
RN
C, E, EE, EF, EG, G,
(Type 4)
201, 203, GG, GA, H, J, JF, JG, JJ, CS Required.
105, 115, RT
205, 207, JL, K, KK, KA, L, LL, S, U9 All except LL,
125, 135 (Type 4)
209, 20X T, W, Y, YY GC
RB
(Type 4) D, DA, M
RH (Manual reset only)
(Type 4)

V1
G, GA, H, J, JJ, K, KA, L,
(Type 4)
LA, S, SA, T, W, Y
ATEX Electrical Equipment for Flammable Atmospheres Rating: EEx d IIC T6 (-40°C to 65°C) or T5 (-40°C to
80°C
Process
Connection
A, AA, AF, AG, B, BB, CL Required.
201, 203, C, E, EE, EF, EG, G, All except:
105, 115, B3, B4,
205, 207, GA, GG, H, J, JF, JG, JJ, U8, U9 C7A KK, LL, TB,
125, 135 B5, B6
209, 20X JL, K, KA, KK, L, LL, S, ZZ, CS, NB,
T, W, Y, YY GG, WV
BB, PP,
201, 203,
105, 115, RR, TT, TP,
205, 207, BG, BH AF, AG, EF, EG, JF, JG U8, U9 C7A
125, 135 VV, YY, HB,
209
HBME
U.L. For Hazardous Locations Class I, Groups B, C, & D; Class I, Groups E, F, & G
Process
Connection
G, GG, GA, H, J, JJ, JL, WV Required
201, 203, 105, 115, K, KK, KA, L, LL, N, NN, NB, NN, PB,
205, 207, 125, 135, B3, B6 S, T, W, Y, YY U8, U9 As Required PC, PP, RR,
209, 20X 1X5 Maximum: SA, SB, TT,
15A @ 300 VAC W, YY, X
10A @ 125 VDC
Electromechanical Approximate
Temperature Switches Shipping Weights
Weight Add
Housing (kgs) Accessories (kgs)
(lbs) (lbs)
AC 1 .5 PK Pipe Kit 1.5 0.7
AG, BG, H3 1.5 .75 TB Junction Box with
5 2.25
AH, BH, NN, N3, N4, PP, P3 2 1 Terminal Block
RM, RN 2.5 1.25 HB, HBME or HT

2.5 1.1
Universal Terminal Box
BA, N6, RB, V1 3 1.5
RT 3.5 1.75 Actual shipping weights may vary from the
L, LC, SC 4 2 charted values because of product material,
TA 4.5 2.25 configuration and packaging requirements.
V2 5 2.5
B3, B4 8 3.5
B5, B6 10 4.5

Electromechanical
Temperature Switches Dimensions
Dimensions in this catalog are for reference only. They may be changed without notice. Contact the factory
for certified drawings for a particular model number. All dimensions shown are expressed as millimeters over
inches. (Linear = mm/in.)
Sensing Bulb
1/2” NPT(M) Extension 316SS
12.7
For “V” Series
0.50 B D
See Housing 22.6
Dimensions 0.89
For All Others
Subtract .29 From
Housing Dimensions
Direct Mount
See Housing Dimensions
Temperature Sensing Bulb

52.3 Sensing Bulb Extension 347SS for Range 105,
2.06 316SS 316SS for All Others
A 1/2” NPT(M)
Armored Capillary 263.4 Maximum

300 Series SS 10.37
306.3
12.06 B D
C
Approximate Range of Adjustment
Remote Mount
Dimensions
B with NB
Feature A B C* D Diameter
Option
135, 125, 135, 125,
Range All 135, 125, 115 105 135, 125 105 105
115 115
Bulb m ft. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in.
201 N/A N/A 105.7 4.16 - - 107.2 4.22 - - - - 9.7 0.38 - -
135 5.3 170 6.7
203 1.8 6.0 112.0 4.41 148.3 5.94 112.0 4.41 to to to to 9.7 0.38 16.0 0.63
396 15.6 433 17.1
147 5.8 170 6.7
205 3.0 10.0 124.7 4.91 148.3 5.94 112.0 4.41 to to to to 9.7 0.38 16.0 0.63
409 16.1 433 17.1
185 7.3 170 6.7
207 4.5 15.0 162.8 6.41 148.3 5.94 112.0 4.41 to to to to 9.7 0.38 16.0 0.63
447 17.6 433 17.1
216 8.5 170 6.7
209 6.0 20.0 194.6 7.66 148.3 5.84 112.0 4.41 to to to to 9.7 0.38 16.0 0.63
480 18.9 433 17.1
* With NB option, dimension C is: 135 to 396mm (5.3 to 15.6 in.) - Remote Mount

Electromechanical
Dimensions in this catalog are for reference only. They may be changed without notice. Contact
the factory for certified drawings for a particular model number. Dimensions in this catalog are
expressed as millimeter over inches (Linear = mm/in.).
Weathertight-Non-hazardous Service (NEMA 4, 4X, IP65)

**
107.2 56.6
4.22 2.23
69.9 28.7
2.75 1.13
33.3 26.2
1.31 Electrical Connection 1.03
3/4” NPT(F)(STD)
(Both Sides on N3 &
P3 HSGS)
158.8
6.25
40.4
1.59
67.1 7.1 13.5 7.1

2.64 0.28 WD. X 0.53 LG. 0.28
Slot (Typical 2)
49.3
1.94
** NN & N3 = (Shown)
N4 = Add 4.6
0.18
PP & P3 = Subtract 1.5
Housing: NN, N3, N4, PP, P3 0.06
93.7
3.69
47.2
1.86
19.6
48.8 0.77
1.92
66.3
2.61
161.4 7.1 Diameter Mounting
6.36 0.28
Hole (Typical 2).
6.4
71.4 0.25
2.81
27.6
1.09
Process Connection
63.5
Housing: N6 2.50

Electromechanical
107.2
4.22 49.3 65.8
1.94 2.59
69.9
2.75 26.2
33.3 1.03
1.31
184.2
7.25
Electrical Connection
RN, RT = 3/4” NPT(F)
RM, RS = M20 x 1.5
40.4
1.59
67.1 7.1 13.5 7.1

2.64 0.28 WD. X 0.53 LG. 0.28
Slot (Typical 2)
28.7
1.13
Housing: RM, RN, RS, RT
138.9 70.1
5.47 Electrical Connection
69.6 3/4” NPT(F)(STD) 2.76
2.74 26.2
114.3
4.50 1.03
57.2
2.25
185.7
7.31
9.7
0.38
70.4
2.77 9 Diameter
32 Hole (Typical 2)
27.7
1.09
Housing: V1
Electromechanical
107.2
4.22
49.3 65.8
1.94 2.59
69.8 28.7
2.75
33.3 1.13
1.31 26.2
9.1 Manual Reset Button
0.36 1.03
3/4” NPT(F)(STD)
202.7 7.1
7.98 0.28
40.4
1.59
67.1
2.64
7.1 13.5
0.28WD. X 0.53 LG.
Slot (Typical 2)
Housing: RB - Manual Reset

Electromechanical
Conventional Explosion Proof
137.2 79.5
5.40 3.13
71.1 20.6
2.80 0.81
3/4” NPT(F)(STD)
190.8
7.51
80.8
3.18
(Typical)
40.4
1.59
124.7 (Typical)
4.91
6.4
0.25
84.3
3.32 7.1
0.28 Diameter
Hole (Typical 2)
Housing: L
108.0
4.25 35.3
146.6 1.39
5.77 Electrical Connection 9.7
73.4 B3 & B6 = 3/4” NPT(F) 0.38
2.89 B4 & B5 = M20 x 1.5
J4 = 3/4” PF(F)
40.9
1.61
237.2
9.34 33.5
1.32
132.1 9.1 Diameter Hole

5.20 0.36 (Typical 2) 26.6
1/4” NPT(F)(LH & RH) 1.05
Vent Connection
40.0
80.0 1.58
3.15
Housing: B3, B4, B5, B6
Electromechanical
142.5 79.5
5.61 3.13
71.1 20.6
2.80 0.81
3/4” NPT(F)(STD)
(Typical 3)
196.1
7.72
80.8
3.18
(Typical)
40.4
1.59
124.7 (Typical)
4.91
6.4
0.25
84.3 7.1 Diameter

3.32 0.28
Hole (Typical 4)
Housing: S
**
151.4
5.96 75.7 **Add 0.5 for LC housing.
0.02
Maximum 2.98
108.0 Maximum 104.9
Electrical Connection 4.13
4.25 3/4” NPT(F)(STD) 35.1
(Typical) 54.1
2.13 (Typical 3) 1.38
8.6
(Typical) (RH. Only on LC) 0.34
External Ground
Lug (Optional)
(Typical 2)
203.2
8.00
131.2
5.17
7.1 Diameter Hole

77.2 0.28
3.04 (Typical 4)
Housing: LC, SC
Electromechanical
20.6
142.5 0.81
5.61
71.1 6.4
2.80 0.25
3/4” NPT(F)(STD)
229.9
9.05
80.8
3.18
40.4 (Typical)
1.59
(Typical)
124.7
4.91
84.3 7.1 Diameter Hole

3.32 0.28
(Typical 4)
Housing: S Manual Reset
138.9 86.4
5.47 3.40
69.3 22.4
Plugged 2.73 0.88
Plugged
195.1
7.68
126.0 3/4” NPT(F)(STD)
4.96
Housing: TA
Electromechanical
Hermetically Sealed-Explosion Proof

Factory Sealed Leads Color Coded & Marked
457.2
18.00 Minimum Length
76.2 Ø Minimum
3.00
Installation
Clearance Electrical Connection
1/2” NPT(M)
28.7
1.13 Hex
Weathertight Cover
Screw
Flexible Seal
Retainer
169.2
6.68
Alternate Style for
AH & AS HSGS
Extension Ground
BG, BH & JH
HSGS
Housing: AG, AH, BG, BH
120.7 Factory Sealed Leads 81.5

4.75 457.2 3.21
108.0 18.00 Minimum Length
4.25
54.1 38.1
2.13 1.50
Electrical
Connection
3/4” NPT(F)(STD)
7.1 Diameter Hole

220.7 0.28
8.69 (Typical 2)
87.6 7.1
3.45 0.28
55.4
Housing: BA 2.18

Electromechanical
Hermetically Sealed-Explosion Proof
138.9 70.1
5.47 69.6 Electrical Connection 2.76
3/4” NPT(F)(Standard)
114.3 2.74 (Factory Sealed Wire 27.7
4.50 57.2 Leads 1.09
2.25 457.2 Minimum Length)
18.00
251.2
9.89
9.7
0.38
70.4 9 Diameter Hole

2.77 32
(Typical 2)
Housing: V2

Electromechanical
General Purpose
52.3 Factory Sealed Leads
Set Point Adjustment 2.06 Color Coded & Marked
Under Weathertight Cap 457.2
Screw 31.8 18.00 Minimum Length
1.25
26.4
1.04
1/2” NPT(M)
155.7 Electrical
6.13 30.2 Connection
1.19 Diameter
Housing: AC (NEMA 1)
66.8 46.7
2.63 1.84
50.8
2.00 28.4
20.6
0.81 7.1 1.12
0.28 Diameter 14.2
Hole (Typical 2) 0.56
160.0
6.30
101.3
3.99
Housing: H3
Electromechanical
Temperature Switches Notes

SOR offers a full line of commercial-grade process instruments.
®
echOsonix™
Level Transmitters
Pressure
Temperature
Flow
Switches
Level
Switches
Level Temperature
Switches
Flow
Pressure
Switches
Process Instrumentation
We Deliver Quality On Time
SOR Inc. SOR Europe, Ltd. SOR - China

14685 West 105th Street Star Road Room 903, No. 10 Building
Lenexa, Kansas 66215 Partridge Green, Sussex Wan Da Plaza
RH13 8RA, United Kingdom No. 93 Jian Guo Road
Phone 913-888-2630 Chao Yang District
Toll Free 800-676-6794 Phone +44-140-371-1331 Beijing, China 100022
Fax 913-888-0767 Fax +44-140-371-0177
Phone +86 (10) 5820 8767
www.sorinc.com Fax +86 (10) 5820 8770
Registered
Form 220 Quality System to ISO 9001 www.sorinc.com
Form 220 (05.07) © 2007 SOR Inc.
4
Instruction Manual
For
3.5 – Limit Switch
Tab 5

Copes-Vulcan
5
Instruction Manual
For
3.6 – Solenoid Valve
Tab 6

Copes-Vulcan
Pilot Operated 3/2•5/2
SERIES
Direct Mount Inline Spool Valves 8551, 8553
4 Anodized Aluminum Bodies • Direct NAMUR Mount
1/4" and 1/2" NPT
Direct
Mount
Features
• Compact spool valve convertible from 3/2 to 5/2 % ^ )
• NAMUR mount construction
• Standard manual operator
• DIN, Watertight and Explosionproof solenoids available
• Single and dual solenoid constructions
• Mountable in any position
• Vents air from spring side of actuator to prevent
corrosion of actuator
Construction
Valve Parts in Contact with Fluids
Body Black Anodized Aluminum
Spring Phosphate treated black steel 3/2 5/2
2 4 2 4
12 12 14
Shading Coil Copper
3 5 3 5
Seals NBR + PUR 1 1
2 4 4 2
12 10 12 14
Core and Core Tube Stainless Steel / Brass
3 5 5 3
End Covers and Plate 6/6 glass filled PA/FV 1 1
Spool Aluminum
AUTOMATION
Internal Parts Zamak, Steel, CA
VALVE
Electrical
Standard Watt Rating and Power Spare Coil
Coil and Consumption Part Number
Class of Enclosure DC AC VA VA
Insulation Type Watts Watts Holding Inrush AC DC
F SC 3 2.5 3.5 6 400125 400125
F SC 6.9 5 7 15 43004649 43004647
Nominal Ambient Temp. Ranges
SC: AC/DC: 5˚F to +140˚F (-15˚C to 60˚C)
F EF 6.9 6.3 7 10.1 266762 270007
EF: AC: 5˚F to +140˚F (-15˚C to 60˚C)
F WT 6.9 6.3 7 10.1 266763 270008
DC: 5˚F to +77˚F (-15˚C to 25˚C)
Standard Voltages: SC: 24, 120, 240 Volts AC, 50-60 Hz; 12, 24, 120 Volts DC.
WT: AC: 5˚F to +140˚F (-15˚C to 60˚C)
WT and EF: 24/50-60HZ, (120/60, 110-120/50), (240/60, 220-240/50) Volts AC;
6, 12, 24, 120 Volts DC.
DC: 5˚F to +77˚F (-15˚C to 25˚C)
Order as 120/60, 110/50 Note: For temperatures below 32˚F (0˚C) moisture-free
Order as 240/60, 220/50 air must be used.
Refer to Engineering Section for details.
Solenoid Enclosures Approvals

SC (2.5W and 3W only) UL recognized component,
Standard: - Prefix
CSA certified.
SC = IP65 type DIN (open frame) per 46244
WT: UL recognized component, CSA certified.
WT = Combination General Purpose and Watertight Types 1, 2, 3, 3S, 4, and 4X
EF: UL and CSA solenoid approval.
EF = Combination Explosionproof and Watertight Types 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 6, 5P, 7, 9 Meets applicable CE directives.
Class I, Div. 1 (Groups A - D) and Class II, Div. 1 Type 9 (Groups E-G)
Refer to Engineering Section for details.
8551_Inline_DMoR1 195
3/2•5/2
SERIES
8551, 8553
Direct
Mount
4
Specifications (English units)
Operating Fluid Watt Rating/
Pressure Temperature °F Class of Coil
Pipe Orifice Cv Differential (psi) (for single and dual solenoid) Single Solenoid Dual Solenoid Insulation
Size Size Flow Max. Max. Const.
(ins.) (ins.) Factor Min. Max. Min. AC DC Catalog Number Catalog Number Ref. AC DC
OPEN FRAME DIN COIL
1/4 1/4 .86 30 150 5 140 140 SC8551A001MS SC8551A002MS 1 2.5 3
1/2 1/2 3.7 30 150 -15 140 140 SC8553A001MS SC8553A002MS 2 5 6.9
WATERTIGHT ENCLOSURE
1/4 1/4 .86 30 150 5 104 77 WT8551A001MS WT8551A002MS 1 6.3 6.9
1/2 1/2 3.7 30 150 -15 140 140 WT8553A001MS WT8553A002MS 2 6.3 6.9
EXPLOSIONPROOF ENCLOSURE
1/4 1/4 .86 30 150 5 104 77 EF8551A001MS EF8551A002MS 1 6.3 6.9
1/2 1/2 3.7 30 150 -15 140 140 EF8553A001MS EF8553A002MS 2 6.3 6.9
1/8 inch NPT exhausts.
Specifications (Metric units)

Operating Fluid Watt Rating/
Kv Pressure Temperature °C Class of Coil
Pipe Orifice Flow Differential (bar) (for single and dual solenoid) Single Solenoid Dual Solenoid Insulation
Size Size Factor Max. Max. Const.
(ins.) (mm) (m3/h) Min. Max. Min. AC DC Catalog Number Catalog Number Ref. AC DC
AUTOMATION
OPEN FRAME DIN COIL

1/4
VALVE
6.4 .7 2 10 -15 60 60 SC8551A001MS SC8551A002MS 1 2.5 3

1/2 13 3.15 2 10 -25 60 60 SC8553A001MS SC8553A002MS 2 5 6.9
WATERTIGHT ENCLOSURE
1/4 6.4 .7 2 10 -15 40 25 WT8551A001MS WT8551A002MS 1 6.3 6.9
1/2 13 3.15 2 10 -25 60 60 WT8553A001MS WT8553A002MS 2 6.3 6.9
EXPLOSIONPROOF ENCLOSURE
1/4 6.4 .7 2 10 -15 40 25 EF8551A001MS EF8551A002MS 1 6.3 6.9
1/2 13 3.15 2 10 -25 60 60 EF8553A001MS EF8553A002MS 2 6.3 6.9
1/8 inch NPT exhausts.
196 8551_Inline_DMoR1
3/2•5/2
SERIES
4 8551, 8553
Direct
Mount
Dimensions inches (mm)
Series 8551 Const. Ref. 1

NPT 1/4 1/8 NPT 1/4 NPT
L1 5.47 (139)
L2 7.56 (192) 3
1
H1 1.30 (33) H1
W 1.77 (45)
NOTE: Valve shown with CM22

DIN terminal coil and connector. W
Connector sold separately.
L1
L2
8551 NAMUR Footprint
1.26 (32)
2 4
.95 (24)
AUTOMATION
VALVE
Series 8553 Const. Ref. 2
NPT 1/2
1/2 NPT
L1 7.76 (197)
L2 10.25 (260) 5 1 3
H1 1.94 (49)
W 2.85 (72) H1
NOTE: Valve shown with CM22

DIN terminal coil and connector. W
Connector sold separately.
L1
L2
8553 NAMUR Footprint
2 4
1.77 (45)
1.57 (40)
8551_Inline_DMoR1 197
6
Instruction Manual
For
3.7– Trap
Tab 7

Copes-Vulcan
STEAM TRAPS
STEAM TRAPS
Watson McDaniel reserves the
WD600 right to change the designs

and/or materials of its
products without notice.
Thermodynamic Steam Trap

©2006 Watson McDaniel Company
Model WD600, WD600L

Sizes 3/8”, 1/2”, 3/4”, 1”
Connections NPT
Body Material Stainless Steel 420F
Options Insulation Cap
PMO Max. Operating Pressure 600 PSIG
TMO Max. Operating Temperature 800ºF
PMA Max. Allowable Pressure 600 PSIG up to 800ºF
TMA Max. Allowable Temperature 800ºF @ 600 PSIG
T Y P I C A L A P P L I C AT I O N S M AT E R I A L S
DRIP, TRACER: The WD600 thermodynamic steam trap is
commonly used as a drip trap on steam mains and steam Body Stainless Steel, AISI 420F
supply lines. These traps can be used on tracing applications; Disc Stainless Steel, AISI 420
however, thermostatic traps are normally recommended for Cover Stainless Steel, AISI 416
this service. Ideal for outdoor applications that are subject Insulation Cap Stainless Steel, AISI 304
to freezing and for superheated steam conditions.
HOW IT WORKS
The thermodynamic trap has cyclic on-off operation with a
disk that is pushed open by incoming condensate and closes
tightly when steam tries to escape.
F E AT U R E S Insulation
Cap
• High pressure applications up to 600 PSIG
• Hardened stainless steel seat and disc for extended service
life even at high pressure
• Single trap will operate over the entire pressure range
(3.5-600 PSIG)
• Unaffected by superheated steam
• Freezeproof when trap is piped in a vertical orientation Cover
for complete drainage of condensate
• Three hole balanced discharge extends life of the seat area
• Trap will function in any orientation (horizontal preferred) Disc
S A M P L E S P E C I F I C AT I O N
3-Hole
The steam trap shall be a thermodynamic disc type with all Balanced
stainless steel construction. Integral seat design and disc to be Discharge
hardened for long service life. Unit shall be capable of installa-
tion in any orientation and self-draining when mounted vertically.
I N S TA L L AT I O N
Trap can be installed in any position; however, horizontal is
preferred. Installation should include isolation valves and a 20
mesh strainer. Do not weld as damage can occur to the seat area.
MAINTENANCE
Dirt is the most common cause of premature failure. For full
maintenance details, see Installation and Maintenance Manual.
OPTIONS
An insulation cap is available to reduce cycle rates and steam
loss in rain, snow, or cold environments.
428 Jones Boulevard • Limerick Airport Business Center • Pottstown PA • 19464 • Tel: 610-495-5131 • Fax: 610-495-5134
4 www.watsonmcdaniel.com
STEAM TRAPS
STEAM TRAPS
WD600
Thermodynamic Steam Trap
B
FLOW
C A
D I M E N S I O N S & W E I G H T S – inches/pounds
Size/Model Connection A B C Weight (lbs)
3/8” WD600 NPT 13/8 111/16 2 0.75
1/2” WD600 NPT 11/2 2 211/16 1.25
3/4” WD600 NPT 13/4 23/8 213/16 2.0
1” WD600 NPT 21/8 213/16 33/16 3.0
1/2” WD600L NPT 11/2 113/16 223/32 1.0
3/4” WD600L NPT 11/2 21/4 23/4 1.75
WD600L HOW TO ORDER

WD600L is a low capacity version of the standard Refer to the capacity chart using differential pressure to deter-
WD600 model. mine which model is required to satisfy the condensate load.
1/2” WD600L has the same capacity as the 3/8” WD600.
3/4” WD600L has the same capacity as the 1/2” WD600.
C A PA C I T I E S – Condensate (lbs/hr)
Pressure (PSIG)
Size/Model 3.5 5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
3/8” WD600 180 185 190 195 200 215 220 230 250 310 375 500 620 710 800 825 900 1070 1120 1185 1 2 9 0
1/2” WD600L
1/2” WD600 300 315 350 380 415 440 470 515 580 710 825 1020 1165 1300 1440 1565 1670 1775 1880 1960 2 0 6 0
3/4” WD600L
3/4” WD600 415 430 475 520 565 610 650 720 825 1020 1185 1480 1710 1950 2110 2265 2490 2625 2780 2985 3140
1” WD600 650 680 740 815 885 940 1000 1080 1225 1500 1800 2215 2625 2935 3300 3600 3875 4120 4350 4560 4840
Note: Maximum back pressure not to exceed 80% of inlet pressure (measured in absolute pressure) or trap may not close.
428 Jones Boulevard • Limerick Airport Business Center • Pottstown PA • 19464 • Tel: 610-495-5131 • Fax: 610-495-5134
www.watsonmcdaniel.com 5
7
Instruction Manual
For
3.8– Isolation (Gate) Valve
Tab 8

Copes-Vulcan
Forged Gate Valves
Class 800 (PN 130)
Conventional Port
1975 PSI @ 100°F (136.2 BAR @ 38°C) ■ Round Bolted Bonnet
HYDROFLUORIC
ACID (HF)
■ Spiral Wound Gasket
For other ratings see pgs. 112-115
ALKYLATION VALVES. ■ Outside Screw & Yoke
A105 Body/Bonnet UOP APPROVED. ■ Bolted Gland
■ Solid Wedge
SERIES NUMBER ■ Hard Faced Seats
Threaded Socket Weld THD/SW
12111 SW12111 TSW12111 ■ API 602
CLASS 800 (PN 130)
12111T+ SW12111T+ ■ ASME B16.34

SW12111HF6
SW12111HF7
MATERIALS MEET
Trim: 13% Cr.
GATE
REQUIREMENTS OF
12111
Seats: HF NACE STANDARD

12111FHF SW12111FHF MR-01-75 FOR
Sizes 1/2-2 (No 1-1/4) SOUR SERVICE
12111MB6 SW12111MB6
Trim: 13% Cr.
Wedge/Seats: HF
12111F8M SW12111F8M Dimensions Bold face numerals are in inches and pounds.
Trim: 316 Blue numerals are in millimeters and kilograms.
Seats: HF
Size NPS 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3*
12111MB8 SW12111MB8 DN 8 10 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80
Trim: 316
Wedge/Seats: HF A-End-to-End 2.75 2.75 3.38 3.38 4.00 4.75 4.75 5.25 7.00 8.00
12111MM SW12111MM 70 70 86 86 102 121 121 133 178 203
12111MMT+ SW12111MMT+ B-Open 6.19 6.19 6.38 6.38 8.31 10.12 10.12 11.10 14.09 18.03
Trim: Monel
157 157 162 162 211 257 257 282 358 458
12111MBS SW12111MBS 5.75 5.75 5.75 5.75 7.38 8.69 8.69 9.41 11.81 14.93
Trim: Monel C-Closed
Wedge: HF 146 146 146 146 187 221 221 239 300 379
D-Seat Diameter .31 .31 .50 .50 .75 1.25 1.25 1.50 2.00 2.75
7.9 7.9 12.7 12.7 19.1 31.8 31.8 38.1 50.8 69.8
E-Handwheel Diameter 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.75 5.75 5.75 7.00 8.00 9.75
102 102 102 102 121 146 146 178 203 248
Weight 4.9 4.8 5.0 4.9 8.3 16.6 16.0 21.8 42.8 75.0
2.2 2.2 2.3 2.2 3.8 7.5 7.3 9.9 19.4 34.0
+ Valves contain TEFLON—maximum temperature 500°F. For Cv factors see page 123, Valve Matrix A.
Refer to pages 116-120 for full materials description. *Outside Scope API602 & B16.34
14
8
Instruction Manual
For
4.1 – Valve
Tab 9

Copes-Vulcan
Union Tech Co., Inc.
11727 Veterans Memorial Drive
Houston, Texas 77067
Ph: (281) 583-7601
Fax: (281) 583-7413
Email: bill.murray@uniontechco.us
Union Tech
Operation & Maintenance Manual
Hornet Valve Maintenance Manual 1

08/30/02 Revision “A”
i. Field Testing
Every Union valve manufactured to ANSI B16.34 latest edition standards and
hydrostatically tested to MSS SP-61 acceptance criteria before it is released for
shipment.
a) Field Testing should not be done unless you have consulted with your
company’s safety manager. There are unforeseen safety hazards with High
Pressure Equipment that personnel should be equipped and familiar with.
Union valves can be field tested before installation providing the correct
equipment is in place. However, to keep this from being necessary, a copy
of Union’s in-house Test Report will be sent with each valve for your
Inspection and Convenience. Union will also have this Test Report on file
should anything happen to the one provided at shipment.
b) Your normal testing procedures can be implemented after the valve is in

line. **** Important **** The valve should be in the Full Open position
for shell test.
ii. Welding
Union Valves are typically supplied in one of three (3) materials; ASTM A-105,
ASTM A182 Gr. F22, and ASTM A182 Gr. F91. The Material Specification will
be engraved on the side of the valve. You must consult with your engineering
department for the proper welding guidelines for your specific type of material.
a) All valves are painted before shipment. Standard requirements on weld

preparations for cleanliness shall apply.
c) To prevent damage to the valve during welding, the valve should be placed
in the Full Open Position and the ground strap should be placed on the
same side of the valve that’s to be welded.
d) A minimum of 1/16” gap between the bottom of the socket-weld end and
the pipe-end should be maintained to prevent cracking of the weld(s).

e) DO NOT EXCEED 1400°F on PWHT (Post Weld Heat Treatment).
Removal of actuator (if supplied) is highly recommended prior to any
welding.
f) DO NOT wrap the entire valve with the ceramic heat tiles during PWHT,
only the welds need to be wrapped.
iii. VALVE MAINTENANCE
Repairable
Maintenance and/or part replacement can be preformed on certain items without
removing the valve from the line. However, major repairs will require the valve
be removed from the line and returned to Union Tech Co., Inc., 11727 Veterans
Memorial Drive, Houston, Texas 77067. Please notify the Union Tech Product
Manager or your Inside Technical Sales Representative.
a) Common Maintenance Items are as follows:

1) Hand Lever
2) Shear Pin
3) Packing Gland
4) Stem Packing
5) Packing Bolts
6) Live Load Springs
7) Mounting Brackets and Hardware.
b) Unauthorized modifications to valve parts or adaption will VOID the

Manufacturer’s Warranty. Please consult Union Tech’s Product Manager
or your Inside Technical Sales Representative prior to any repairs or
modifications.
c) All personnel performing field maintenance should be familiar with the

potential risks associated with high-pressure valves as well as the valve in
particular.
d) A general drawing of the valve along with a BOM is provided later in this
manual.
e) Maintenance is to be performed only when the valve is depressurized and

cooled.
iv. DISASSEMBLY

General guidelines for valve disassembly and re-assembly are as follows:
a) On valves with hand levers, note the position of the hand lever so it may
be reinstalled in the same position. (With the valve in the open position,
the hand lever should be parallel with the valve and extending outwards
toward the upstream end.)
1) Using a punch, drive the shear pin out and lift the hand lever off.
b) Note the position of the actuator in order to reinstall later.

1) Remove the bolts holding the actuator in position and set aside.
2) The stem adaption is removed by driving out the shear pin and
lifting the adaptor off of the stem.
c) Remove four (4) bolts holding the mounting bracket. Note: on valves with
an actuator, the bracket can be mounted in two (2) directions 180° apart.
Either way will work due to the line up pins keeping the bracket perfectly
aligned with the valve. On valves using hand levers, note the position of
the mounting bracket. It must be re-installed the same way for the hand
lever stops to align correctly.
d) Remove the four (4) nuts on the packing gland. Remove the live load
springs.
e) Lift the packing gland off over the stem.
f) The stem packing can be removed at this time. A pick usually works well
for this. Note: there are four (4) packing rings. They are placed on the
stem as follows. One (1) anti-extrusion ring, two (2) packing rings, and one
(1) anti-extrusion ring. Care should be given not to scar the stem or
packing bore. Scarring can cause stem leaks.
g) Clean all parts for re-assembly. Discard all the old stem packing.
h) Inspect the stem and packing gland for galling or wear. If either is
present upon inspection, please consult Union Tech’s Product
Manager or your Inside Technical Sales Representative.
v. Re-Assembly
In general, re-assembly will go in the reverse order of disassembly. However, we would
like to mention several things to look for during re-assembly.

a) When installing the stem packing, the two (2) outer rings (anti-extrusion rings)
are brittle and care should be taken when sliding them over the stem and into the
packing box. Once the ring is in the packing box, you can use the gland flange to
push it farther in so the next ring can be installed more easily. Caution: The
packing installation process can cause the stem to push down and hit the ball, so
the stem may have to be pulled up once the packing process is complete.
b) After all four (4) packing rings are installed, put the packing gland in place and
install the live load springs. Two (2) springs per stud with the concave side facing
each other.
c) Once the live load springs are in place, install the nuts using anti-seize on threads
(high-temp recommended) one on each stud and torque to specifications as
follows:
1. 3/8” Nuts = 3 ft/lbs.
2. ½” Nuts = 5 ft/lbs.
d) Note: once valve is back in service, additional adjustment may be required if a

stem leak occurs.
e) After re-inserting the shear pin in the stem adaptor or hand lever, you should take
a center punch and ping the area around the outside of the pin to keep the pin
from working its way out. This should be done on both ends of the pin.
f) Note: If the stem has been turned for any reason, you can re-align the stem by
looking at a punch mark on the top edge of the stem. The punch mark should be
in line with the valve facing the down-stream side. This will place the ball in the
closed position with the mate lapped areas together.
g) Re-install hand lever or actuator and you are ready to go on line.
h) DO NOT rest the actuator on top of stem or drive stem in towards the ball.
This will cause the stem to push the ball out of sealing pocket and cause
leaks.

9
Instruction Manual
For
4.2 – Actuator
Tab 10

Copes-Vulcan
UNITORQ "M" SERIES
RACK AND PINION PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS
INSTALLATION
OPERATION &
MAINTENANCE
MANUAL 5TH EDITION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1-1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................... 2
2-1 STORAGE ..................................................................................................... 2
3-1 OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS SPRING RETURN..............................2
3-2 OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS DOUBLE ACTING.................3
4-1 ACTUATOR INSTALLATION....................................................................4-5
5-1 DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE .................................................................5-6
5-2 LOW TEMPERATURE O-RING INSTALLATION..........................7
6-1 REASSEMBLY PROCEDURE . .................................................................8-9
7-1 SPRING INSTALLATION.............................................................................10
8-1 SOLENOID VALVE CHARACTERISTICS............................................10-11
8-2 SOLENOID VALVE INSTALLATION.........................................12-13
8-3 SOLENOID VALVE INSTALLTION-EXPLOSION PROOF...........14
9-1 SPEED CONTROL DEVICES......................................................................15
10-1 CCW TO CCCW CONVERSION............................................................15-16
11-1 ACTUATOR SIZING.....................................................................................16
11-2 DOUBLE ACTING ACTUATORS..................................................16
11-3 SPRING RETURN ACTUATORS..............................................16-17
12-1 EXTENDED FINAL LIMIT STOPS.............................................................17
13-1 DOUBLE LIMIT STOPS..............................................................................18
14-1 ACTUATOR DIMENSIONS.........................................................................19
15-1 UNITORQ TECHNICAL INFORMATION................................................ 20
16-1 UNITORQ ACTUATOR MATERIAL TABLE..............................................21
17-1 WARRANTY INFORMATION .................................................................. 22

1-1 INTRODUCTION
UniTorq offers one of the largest ranges of pneumatic rack and pinion actuators on the market.
Unitorq actuators are designed to operate with pressurized air, but will function equally as well with hydraulic
fluid, water or inert fluids. Our actuators are designed to operate within the pressure range of 20 PSIG to 150
PSIG and are offered in two styles: the Double Acting model and the Spring Return. The double acting model
is available in 90o, 120o,135o and 180o versions. The Spring Return version is available only as a 90o model.
The double acting and spring return actuators can easily be field converted to other configurations by insertion
or removal of the unique patented UniTorq spring cartridges.
2-1 STORAGE
All UniTorq actuators are factory lubricated for 2,000,000 cycles under normal operating conditions. The
actuator ports are plugged to prevent liquids or other materials from entering the actuator during shipment. If the
actuators are to be stored for a long period of time before installation, the units should be stroked periodically to
prevent the seals from setting. (Note: the plugs must be removed in order to stroke actuator.) Storage should be
indoors and the units should be protected against humidity and other harmful elements.
A B A B
CLOSED POSITION OPEN POSITION
Figure 1. A Figure 1. B
A B A B
OPEN POSITION CLOSED POSITION
Figure 1. C Figure 1. D
FIGURES 1. A - 1. D
Cut away top view of the UniTorq Spring Return actuator.
1. A-1.B Closed Clockwise
1.C-1.D Closed Counter Clockwise
The UniTorq actuator has simple operational characteristics. Port A is connected to the interior cavity
between the pistons. Port B is connected to the end cap cavities. In figure 1.A, we see allowing air to
exhaust through Port A, we have the normally closed position for the actuator. If we pressurize Port A, as in
figure 1.B, the pinion will rotate in the counter clockwise direction and we see the open position of the
actuator. (Note: in the case of air failure, spring return actuators will satisfy the conditions shown in Figures
1.A and 1.C using the stored energy of the springs.)
2
3-2 OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS (DOUBLE ACTING)
A B A B
CLOSED POSITION OPEN POSITION
Figure 1. E Figure 1. F
A B A B
OPEN POSITION CLOSED POSITION

Figure 1. H Figure 1. I
FIGURES 1.E - 2.I

Cut away top view of the UniTorq Double Acting actuator.
1. E-1.F Closed Clockwise
1.H-1.I Closed Counter Clockwise
The UniTorq double acting actuators has simple operating charateristics. Port A is connected to
the interior cavity between the pistons. Port B is connected to the end cap cavities. In Figure 1.E, we see
that pressurizing port B we have the closed position of the actuator. If we pressurize Port A and exhaust
B, as in Figure 1.F the pinion will rotate in the counter clockwise direction and the actuator will go to it
open position. Althought the UniTorq actuator typically operates counter clockwise to open and clockwise
to close, it is possible to reverse the operational mode. Figure 1.H & 1.I show the same double acting
actuator with the piston orientation changed to convert the actuator from close clockwise to close counter
clockwise ( as discribed in Section 10-1 CCCW conversion).
3
4-1 ACTUATOR INSALLATION
The UniTorq actuator is designed to be easly installed. The actuator comes with an ISO bottom
mounting pattern and star broached on the pinion allowing for simpler coupling fabrication. Additional valve
mounting patterns are available upon request.
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
Table 1
ISO dimensions represents
actuator mounting bolt circle.
ISO DIMENSION A Model A Bolt Circle B Bolt Size C Bolt Circle D Bolt Size
B Bolt Size
M10 1.65 10-32 1.42 10-32
M20 1.97 1/4-20 1.42 10-32
M30 2.76 5/16-18 1.97 1/4-20
M52 2.76 5/16-18 1.97 1/4-20
M73 2.76 5/16-18 1.97 1/4-20
M103 2.76 5/16-18 1.97 1/4-20
M148 4.02 3/8-16 2.76 5/16-18
M222 4.02 3/8-16 2.76 5/16-18
M295 4.02 3/8-16 2.76 5/16-18
M470 4.92 1/2-13 4.02 3/8-16
M586 4.92 1/2-13 4.02 3/8-16
M900 6.50 3/4-10 4.92 1/2-13
M213 5.51 5/8-11 - -
M2366 6.50 3/4-10 - -
ISO DIMENSION C M2958 6.50 3/4-10 - -
D Bolt Size M3720 6.50 3/4-10 - -
Figure 2
Bottom view of the
UniTorq actuator with
ISO dimensions.
Table 2
1. Insert coupling into the actuator and the valve stem to check
for proper fit. NOTE: IF ACTUATOR IS DOUBLE Bolt Size
ACTING, CHECK TO SEE IF PINION IS IN ITS
10-32
REQUIRED POSITION.
1/4-20
2. Make sure valve is in the normal position before proceeding. 5/16-18
Figure 3 describes the correct normal pinion position for all 3/8-16
CCW and double acting UniTorq actuators. (Note: the pinion 1/2-13
for CCCW actuators will be rotated by 90 ) O 3/4-10
3. Install mounting bracket on to valve and hand tighten all 5/8-11
fasteners. (Be sure not to fully torque bolts until entire assembly
is correctly aligned and installed.)
4. Place coupling on valve stem and position actuator over coupling and onto mounting bracket. Align
valve and actuator assembly so as to eliminate shear forces. Tighten all assembly fasteners to the
appropriate torque.
4
Limit Switch and
Positioner Namur
mounting pad
Figure 3
Figure 3 shows an actuator in the
normal position (CCW operation) with
the pinion flats perpendicular to the
centerline of the actuator.
5. Actuate pneumatically several times to ensure that the coupling is not binding. If unit does not
function properly, disassemble and repeat steps 1-5, as detailed in section 5-1. If problems persist,
contact your local UniTorq representative.
6. After all mounting procedures are completed, it is necessary to set the travel stops to ensure proper
rotation. The UniTorq travel stop allows for a range of 95O to 85O. If a larger range is necessary,
consult section 12-1 for information on extended travel limit stops. NOTE: IMPROPER SETTING
OF TRAVEL STOPS CAN REDUCE ACTUATOR'S LIFE.
7. Rotate valve assembly to desired position. (It is best to consult valve I & M sheet to determine the
correct set point for the valve.)
8. Loosen both sealing nuts. Torque travel stops until the stops contact the pistons. Be sure not to alter
the valve position while setting the travel stops. Torque the sealing nuts until secure. Retest actuator to
assure that there are no end cap air leaks.
5-1 DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE
1. Disconnect all electrical and air supplies from the actuator.
CAUTION:
NEVER DISASSEMBLE AN ACTUATOR THAT IS UNDER PRESSURE
2. Remove actuator from mounting bracket and coupling (limit switches and positioners when applicable)
and place in clean environment.
3. Match the actuator and end caps, allowing for the correct reassembly of the actuator.
NOTE: IF THE END CAPS ARE NOT REPLACED WITH THE CORRECT
ORIENTATION, THE ACTUATOR WILL NOT FUNCTION PROPERLY. END
CAPS MUST BE REINSTALLED WITH "UP" SIDE ON TOP.
4. Remove the eight socket head cap screws and remove end caps.
5
5. Remove O-Rings from end cap. (Note: if actuator has not been in service, it will be necessary
to replace the O-Ring set.)
6. Rotate pinion in Counter Clockwise direction (Note: if

unit is a CCCW, rotation will be in opposite direction)
until pistons are far enough from cylinder to be removed
by hand. If pistons are too difficult to remove by hand,
it is acceptable to use a pair of pliers to assist in their
removal. (Note: be sure not to scar the surface of pistons.)
Remove both pistons, noting the orientation of the pistons,
so that during reassembly the pistons will be replaced in the
same orientation. (Figure 4.) Figure 4
This figure shows the actuator pinion
rotated until pistons disengage
from pinion gears.
7. Remove snap ring and delrin washer from top of pinion.

Place the actuator between two blocks of wood so that the
pinion is free to be removed through the bottom of the
actuator body. Using a rubber mallet, lightly tap the top of
the pinion. When the pinion is loose from the body remove
the pinion through the bottom (Figure 5).
Figure 5
This figure demonstrates the

removal of pinion through the
bottom of the actuator.
8. If Actuator has been in service the following components should be replaced. The O-Rings and guide
kits contains the following items: (Note: a repair kit contains both the O-Ring set and the guide set.)
Item # Qty Description Item # Qty Description

1 2 O-Ring (Piston) 1 1 Shaft (Upper Guide)
2 2 O-Ring (End Cap) 2 1 Shaft (Lower Guide)
3 1 O-Ring (Shaft Upper) 3 2 Piston Guide Skate
4 1 O-Ring (Shaft Lower) 4 2 Piston Guide Ring
5 1 Snap Ring
6 1 Pinion Washer
7 2 Air Passage O-Ring * Table 3. B
Guide Set (Required Parts)
Table 3. A
O-Rings Set (Required Parts)
* = M3720 Only
6
5-2 LOW TEMPERATURE O-RING INSTALLATION
1. Disassemble actuator as described in section 5-1.
2. Using a flat head screwdriver, remove the O-Rings from the various actuator components:
(See section 16-1 for actuator parts list.)
a. Piston O-Rings (2 places)
b. End Caps (2 places)
c. Upper Pinion O-Ring (1 place)
d. Lower Pinion O-Ring (1 place)
e. Air Passage O-Ring (2 places)
3. Using mineral spirits (or other mild solvent), remove the lubrication from each actuator component.
(Note: clean all surfaces thoroughly prior to installation of new O-Ring set.)
4. Separate O-Rings and determine the locations for installation:

a. Piston O-Rings: will be the thickest O-Rings (2 pieces), (See Note.)
b. End Cap O-Rings: will have the largest O-Ring diameter (2 pieces), (See Note.)
c. Pinion O-Rings: of the 4 remaining O-Rings, the largest is installed in the lower pinion
O-Ring groove. The second largest is installed in the upper pinion O-Ring groove.
d. Air passage seals: the last 2 O-Rings are installed between the end cap and the actuators
internal air passage.
(Note: if these O-Rings are not properly seated, they may be pinched during reassembly and
subsequently leak.)
5. Install low temperature O-Ring set. If the O-Rings are difficult to install, the O-Rings may be slightly
stretched and lubricated to ease installation. (Note: be sure to use the lubricant provided when
lubricating the O-Rings.) When installing the end cap O-Rings, be sure to seat the O-Ring properly.
6. Apply lubricant to the internal portions of the actuator:

a. Inner bore of actuator.
b. Piston wear surfaces (piston skate, piston bearing & piston O-Ring).
c. Piston rack (apply on the full length of the piston rack).
d. Pinion gear teeth.
e. Pinion wear surfaces and O-Rings (both upper and lower areas).
7. Assemble actuator as described 6-1.
7
6-1 REASSEMBLY PROCEDURE
1. Inspect all wear surfaces for excessive wear or possible damage.
CAUTION:
BE SURE THAT ALL PARTS ARE STILL WITHIN FACTORY SET
TOLERANCES BEFORE REASSEMBLY
2. Make sure all metallic parts are clean and free of any nicks or burrs.
3. Install O-Rings (and wear surface skates and bearings when applicable) on pistons, end caps
and pinion.
4. Lubricate the inside bore of the cylinder, O-Rings, piston skate, piston guides, pinion bearing
with compatible lubricant. In the case of a low temperature application (i.e. below
0o F), consult UniTorq for correct lubricant type. NOTE: ALL O-RINGS SHOULD BE
REPLACED AS A MATTER OF POLICY IF THE ACTUATOR HAS BEEN IN
SERVICE.
5. Insert pinion into actuator body. Install pinion washer and snap ring.
6. Insert pistons into cylinder body until the pistons begin to mesh with the pinion. Make sure that
the pistons are symmetrically placed inside the cylinder body. This is very important. Be sure that tooth
engagement is even on both pistons. If the pistons are not tracking properly remove and reinsert
pistons.
7. Apply equal pressure on each piston until they are fully engaged with the pinion. Rotate pinion until
actuator is fully closed.
8. Check the top of pinion for correct orientation. If the pinion flats are
perpendicular to the cylinder body then proceed to the next step.
(Note: For CCCW applications, the pinion flats should be parallel to
the cylinder body.) If the pinion is incorrectly positioned, as demonstrated
in figure 6, then proceed to part 8b.
Figure 6
Actuator with pinion flats
45 degrees of perpendicular
8b. Turn actuator up on its side. Rotate pinion counter clockwise until both pistons disengage
from pinion. Rotate pinion with a wrench to correct position. Apply light pressure to
pistons until pinion and pistons engage. Close actuator and check for correct pinion orientation.
(Repeat this step as many times as necessary to get the correct orientation.)
8
9. Insert springs. (For information on the loading of springs refer to section 7-1.)
10. Replace end caps, being sure to position them in same orientation as before.
NOTE: TORQUE SCREWS IN ALTERNATING ORDER TO ENSURE THAT THE
O-RING SEATS PROPERLY.
11. End cap screws should be torqued, in alternating order, to the factory standard. Refer to Table 4
for correct bolt torque specifications.
UNITORQ MODEL FASTNER FASTENER TORQUE

UNC METRIC SPEC..
lbs-in/N-m
M20-M30 #10-32 M5 70/8
M52-M73-M103 1/4-20 M6 106/12
M148-M222-M295 5/16-18 M8 133/15 Table 4

End cap fastener torque
M470-M586 3/8-16 M 10 177/20 specifications.
M900-M1213 1/2-13 M 12 250/28
M2366-M2958-M3720 9/16-12 M 14 354/40
12. Pressurize Port B (Fig 1A-1D) on actuator body to test for air leaks. Leaks can occur around pinion
and between end cap and body mating surfaces. If an air leak is found near the end cap, remove end
cap and check for proper O-Ring seating. If O-Rings appear to be in good condition, repeat step 11.
9
7-1 SPRING INSTALLATION
UniTorq actuators have the unique ability to be field converted from Double Acting to a Spring Return
actuator very easily by adding the spring configuration inside the end caps. (Note: refer to the instructions
below.) The UniTorq actuator can accept up to 6 cartridge springs in each end cap, but not less than 2 spring
cartridges per end cap. The number of cartridge springs loaded into the actuator affects the amount of torque
the actuator will be able to generate during the closing and opening cycles. Review sections 11-X on actuator
sizing for correct procedures in selecting spring combinations.
1. Match mark cylinder body and end caps to ensure proper assembly. NOTE: COUNT OUT THE
CORRECT NUMBER OF SPRINGS TO BE USED BEFORE DISASSEMBLY IS
PERFORMED.
2. Remove end caps. (Count out correct number of springs before attempting to convert unit.)
Total # of 2 3 4 5 6
Springs
2 3
Spring 1/4 1/3/5 2/3/5/6 1/3/4/5/6 All
1 4 Location Positions
(Right cap)
6 5 Spring All
Locations 1/4 1/3/5 2/3/5/6 1/2/3/4/6 Positions
(Left cap)
Figure 7 Table 5
Spring orientation chart
Right view of end cap
3. Insert the correct number of springs in EACH end cap in the accordance with Table 5 and
Figure 7. (Example : Model # M30 K4-4 = 4 springs/end cap. Total of 8 springs.)
4. In the case of a K5 actuator be sure to offset the emply spring socket. Table 5 shows the
correct spring locations for the left and right end caps.
8-1 SOLENOID VALVE CHARACTERISTICS
UniTorq direct mount Solenoid Valves are permenitly lubricated and are designed for long life.
These solenoid valves are specially designed to be easy installed on pneumatic actuators. The solenoids
come equipped with BUNA O-Rings to seal the valve ports to the actuator body.
Operation:
Single Coil Dual Coil
10
Single Coil Solenoids:
Port 1 is the supply port and ports 3 and 5 are the exhaust ports for both the dual coil and single
coil types. The exhaust port may be equipped with silencers or speed controls to control the actuation
speed. Ports A and B are the actuator input ports. In the normal position air goes from the supply port
(port 1) to port B. During solenoid activation the flow will be from the supply port to port A.
PORT B PORT A
FIGURE 8
UniTorq SV 1
Solenoid Valve
1/2" NPT
EXHAUST
PORT 3
SUPPLY PORT EXHAUST
(Port 1) PORT 5
Dual Coil Solenoids:

Dual coil solenoids can be operated in two different modes.
Mode 1: Energize solenoid A to connect the Supply Port to Port A. The spool which directs the air
flow will respond in less than one second. After the spool has adopted its new position the coil can be de-
energized. To direct the air flow to Port B engergize solenoid B which can also be de-engergized after the
spool has been moved.
Mode 2: All of the prevous conditions apply except that the coil moving the spool can be left
energized. The only important consideration is that YOU MUST DE-ENERGIZE COIL A BEFORE ENERGIZING
COIL B. The converse is also true. De-energize Coil B before energizing Coil A.
PORT B PORT A
1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT
COIL B COIL A
FIGURE 9
UniTorq SV 2
Solenoid Valve
EXHAUST EXHAUST
PORT 3 SUPPLY PORT PORT 5
(Port 1)
11
8-2 SOLENOID VALVE INSTALLATION
Note: Make sure that Port O-Rings are correctly placed inside O-Ring groove.
1. Affix solenoid to actuator and tighten screw to 70 in-lbs.
2. Disconnect soleniod wire hood. Wire terminal block

and replace hood. (See Figure 10)
Note: Terminal designation

1. Positive
2. Neutral
3. Ground
3. Energize solenoid valve serveral times and test for leaks and
proper operation. Note: Solenoid nut should be hand tight.
1 Positive
Ground To Output Device
2 Neutral
FIGURE 10
Note: Wiring diagram is the same for all voltages.
(24/48/120/220 AC : 12/24/48/120 DC)
12
Manual Override:
The UniTorq solenoid valve comes equipped with a manual override. A small red lever located
between the valve body and the coil positioned perpendicular to the long axis of the valve body allows for the
overriding of the solenoid if necessary. The normal position for the switch will be perpendicular to the long
axis of the valve body. A 900 rotation of the level in the counter clockwise direction will manually override the
solenoid in the disengaged posistion until the level is returned to its original position.
Solenoid Classification:
The UniTorq solenoid valve is designed to the NEMA 4 and 4X standards. The UniTorq solenoid
valve can be adapted to the 7 and 9 classifications by installing a special solenoid on the standard valve body.
NEMA 4, 4X: Watertight and Dust tight - indoor & outdoor. Protects against windblown dust, rain, splashing
water and hose directed water and is corrosion resistant.
NEMA 7, 9: All of the above standard plus: Class I & Class II, indoor hazardous locations, explosion proof.
Which includes groups A, B, C, D, E, F, and G.
Specifications:
1. SV1 NAMUR 4 Way NEMA 4 solenoid valve with standard namur mount (M10 - M3720)
Specifications:
Nominal Voltage: 110 VAC +/- 10%
Port Dimensions: Port 1 = 1/4" NPT (Ports 3 & 5 = 1/8")
Power: 60 Hz AC at 3.3 Watts
Pressure Range: Min - 29 psi. / Max - 145 psi.
CV Factor: 9
In addition to these two basic models UniTorq also offers a NEMA 4, 7, and 9 upgrade for explosion proof
applications. The UniTorq explosion proof solenoid can easily be mounted to the standard UniTorq valve block
with the addition of a spacer block and a valve adapter kit.
2. SV1 NAMUR 4 Way NEMA 4, 7, and 9 solenoid valve with Namur Mounting
Specifications:
Nominal voltage: 100VAC +/- 10%
Port Dimensions: 1,3,5 1/4" NPT (Ports 3 & 5 1/8" NPT)
Power: 60 Hz AC at 5.9 Watts
Pressure Range: Min - 29 psi. / Max - 145 psi.
CV Factor: 9
13
8-3 SOLENOID VALVE INSTALLATION - EXPLOSION PROOF
The UniTorq solenoid valve can be converted to comply with the NEMA 7 & 9 standard by adding an
explosion proof coil.
Figure 11
UniTorq Explosion proof
soleneoid valve
Exploded view
1. Choose the appropriate sized direct mount solenoid valve: Remove lock nut to enable coil removal.
2. Affix solenoid valve (with spacer block in place) to side of actuator. (Note: be sure that all 4 O-Rings
remain in the O-Ring grooves and are not pinched.)
3. Tighten Coil adapter. (Note: coil adapter should be tight against adapter plate collar.) Replace coil and
lock nut. (Note: do not tighten lock nut until conduit assembly is complete.)
4. Install Nema 7 rated conduit. See figure 12 for typical conduit installation.
5. Prior to tightening lock nut, be sure the conduit assembly

is not exerting excessive load on the solenoid valve.
CAUTION:
THE SOLENOID VALVE SHOULD NOT BE
SUBJECTED TO A TORQUE GREATER THAN
800 IN-LBS BY THE CONDUIT ASSEMBLY. Figure 12
Typical conduit assembly
Explosion Proof
14
9-1 SPEED CONTROL DEVICES
UniTorq actuators are designed to enable the user to obtain the lowest possible cycle time. In some
instances, it is desirable to enable the actuator to cycle more slowly than the standard speed. In these cases a
speed control device is necessary. UniTorq can provide speed controls to obtain varying cycle times.
When using speed controls, coat the speed control threads with pipe sealing compound prior to
installation to avoid air leakage. The cycle time can be changed by loosening the speed control nut and then
tightening or loosening the adjustment screw. To increase cycle time, tighten the adjustment screw. To
decrease the cycle time, loosen the adjustment screw. (Note: be sure to tighten the speed control nut prior to
commencing operation.)
10-1 CCW TO CCCW CONVERSION

UniTorq actuators typically come from the factory as Closed Clock-wise (CCW) units. In the event
that the actuator needs to be changed from CCW to a Closed Counter Clock-wise (CCCW) actuator.
UniTorq actuators can be easily field converted to this configuration.
1. Remove end caps, pistons and the pinion as described in the disassembly procedure. Prior to
reassembly, rotate both pistons 180o along the long axis of the piston. (See Figure 14.)
Upon rotation of pistons, reassebly can be accomplished by following the reassembly
instruction in Section 6-1 Steps 1-12 of this manual.
Figure 14 14.a 14. b

Figure 14.a roates to position
14.b for conversion of actuator
from CCW to CCCW
NOTE: REPLACE SPRINGS PRIOR TO TESTING IF NECESSARY
15
2. After this procedure has been accomplished, you should be able to put air into the right air
port and move the actuator counter clock-wise. When air is placed in the left port, the actuator
now rotates in the clockwise direction.
11-1 ACTUATOR SIZING
Prior to actual sizing; it is important to obtain certain information. Key numbers to obtain are as follows:
• Torque required to open the valve (Break Torque)
• Torque required to close: the valve (Seating Torque)
• Torque required to rotate the valve (Running Torque)
• Supply-air pressure (To Actuator)
• Differential Pressure of Valve/Damper
Obtaining the above information allows you to properly and effectively size the actuator. (Note: double
acting actuators have a constant torque throughout their stroke. When determining the air supply pressure, it
is important that you use the minimum air pressure that the actuator will experience and not the average air
supply pressure. If an actuator is supplied by a lower air pressure than it is sized for, failure or improper
performance will occur.)
UniTorq offers a Windows based sizing program for double acting and spring return actuators to make
sizing easier. Please refer to your local sales representive for more information or to obtain the latest
edition.
11-2 DOUBLE ACTING ACTUATORS
1. Select the largest torque (opening or closing torque) and increase that number by 10%.
(Note: adding 10% will ensure an acceptable factor of safety. The data published in
the sizing table indicates the actuator's maximum capability for a given pressure.)
2. Look in the column that corresponds to the supply pressure, you have selected. Move down
the chart until you have found a torque which is larger than the torque determined for your
application. After you have found the correct value move across the table horizontally to
determine the correct actuator.
11-3 SPRING RETURN ACTUATORS
1. Multiply both your valve closing torque and your valve opening torque by 20%. (This
will provide an acceptable factor of safety.) NOTE: THE VALVE CLOSING TORQUE
CORRESPONDS TO THE SPRING END COLUMN AND THE VALVE OPENING
TORQUE CORRESPONDS TO THE ACTUATOR AIR PRESSURE COLUMN.
16
Example: Given information-Valve opening torque (VOT) = 800 in-lbs.
Valve closing torque (VCT) =750 in-lbs.
1. Increase by 20% + VOT = 960in-lbs : 20% + VCT = 900in-lbs
2. Refer to table below:
Column 1 Column 2
Model Type Supply Pressure Spring Stroke
80 Psi Torque
Table 6 Air Stroke Torque
Sizing Sample
Chart K3 1690 (in-lbs) 774 (in-lbs)
M295 K4 1283 1033
K5 876 1290
NOTE: THIS TABLE IS AN EXCERPT FROM THE SIZING CHART
PROVIDED BY UNITORQ.
2. To satisfy all conditions of this application we compare the VOT to the column 1 and the VCT to
column 2. Since the M295 K4 satisfies both conditions, we select this actuator.
12-1 EXTENDED FINAL LIMIT STOPS
The UniTorq line of actuators also includes a special feature called the extended final limit stop. This
feature allows for the adjusting of the total amount of rotation of an actuator. To install this feature, perform
the following steps: (Note: be sure to follow the disconnection procedure outlined in section 5-1.)
1. Remove the sealing nut and end stop from both end caps. Sealing nuts have a small groove
cut into the bottom to allow for the sealing O-Ring to be seated. Be sure to replace the
O-Ring when replacing the sealing nut.
2. After disassembly, install the extended limit stops in the manner described in the installation
section 4-1, parts 6 through 8. (Note: this information refers to the travel stops, but in
this configuration the travel stops and the extended limit stops act in the same manner.)
17
13-1 DOUBLE LIMIT STOPS
The new DLS configuration allows for quicker and safer stroke travel adjustment with no increase in external
dimensions or additional caps. Adjustments are easier than ever before with improved strength and
performance.
The new DLS actuator allows for approximately 5 degrees of stroke over-travel in each direction. The
effective operation of the actuator is now -50 to 950, with adjustment of over 100 at either end of travel. This
will allow the user to fine tune the actuator for optimal valve performance and life.
The travel stops are located at the end caps. Facing the actuator with the air ports nearest to you the open
(piston in) travel stop is located on the left. The closed (piston out) travel stop is on the right end cap. It is the
gold zinc plated nut. To adjust the open position simply back off the lock nut and turn the setscrew in
clockwise (CW) to reduce travel or out counter clockwise (CCW) to inverse travel. To set the close stop,
loosen the locknut on the right side travel stop and screw it set screw inwards, clockwise (CW), to increase
travel or outwards, counter clockwise (CCW), to decrease the travel.
ACTUATOR SHOWN IN OPEN POSITION
ACTUATOR SHOWN IN CLOSED POSITION
ADJUSTMENT FOR OPEN ADJUSTMENT FOR CLOSE

STROKE. SCREW CCW TO STROKE. SCREW CW TO
INCREASE TRAVEL INCREASE TRAVEL
AIR PORTS
18
14-1 ACTUATOR DIMENSIONS
PROPRIETARY MOUNTING
M20 - M103
OUTPUT SHAFT
OUTPUT SHAFT
MODEL A FO B FO C* D* E F G H I L L1* M N P Q R S
M10 1.65 FO4 1.42 FO3 #10-32 #10-32 9 OR 11MM 0.55 2.02 2.54 0.35 4.33 - 0.48 - 2.60 3.50 1/4 .94
M20 1.97 FO5 1.42 FO3 1/4-20 #10-32 14MM 0.71 1.97 2.32 0.39 5.00 7.52 0.47 0.79 2.91 3.82 1/4 .94
M30 2.76 FO7 1.97 FO5 5/16-18 1/4-20 14MM 0.71 2.36 2.76 0.39 5.24 7.99 4.47 0.79 3.46 4.37 1/4 .94
M52 2.76 FO7 1.97 FO5 5/16-18 1/4-20 17MM 0.75 2.56 3.27 0.39 6.10 9.29 0.55 1.02 3.94 4.84 1/4 .94
M73 2.76 FO7 1.97 FO5 5/16-18 1/4-20 17MM 0.75 2.56 3.58 0.39 6.97 10.63 0.55 1.02 4.25 4.95 1/4 .94
M103 2.76 FO7 1.97 FO5 5/16-18 1/4-20 17MM 0.75 2.76 3.94 0.55 7.99 12.36 0.79 1.38 4.61 5.55 1/4 .94
M148 4.02 F10 2.76 FO7 3/8-16 5/16-18 22MM 0.96 3.54 4.72 0.55 8.50 12.72 0.79 1.97 5.51 6.45 1/4 .94
M222 4.02 F10 2.76 FO7 3/8-16 5/16-18 22MM 0.96 3.54 4.72 0.79 11.18 16.85 1.10 1.97 5.51 6.71 1/4 .94
M295 4.02 F10 2.76 FO7 3/8-16 5/16-18 22MM 0.98 4.06 5.39 0.79 11.42 17.76 1.10 1.97 6.30 7.51 1/4 .94
M470 4.92 F12 4.02 F10 1/2-13 3/8-16 27MM 1.07 4.33 6.77 0.79 13.27 - 1.10 2.36 7.80 9.70 1/4 .94
M586 4.92 F12 4.02 F10 1/2-13 3/8-16 27MM 1.07 4.33 6.77 1.10 14.49 22.36 1.42 2.36 7.80 9.70 1/4 .94
M900 6.50 F16 4.92 F12 3/4-10 1/2-13 36MM 1.57 5.31 8.82 1.26 16.62 - 1.42 2.84 10.00 11.77 1/4 .94
M1213 5.51 F14 - - 5/8-11 - 36MM 1.57 5.31 8.82 1.26 17.72 27.24 1.57 2.95 10.00 11.77 1/4 .94
M2366 6.50 F16 - - 3/4-10 - 46MM 1.57 6.26 10.71 1.26 23.07 35.63 1.57 3.54 11.89 13.66 1/4 .94
M2958 6.50 F16 - - 3/4-10 - 46MM 1.53 6.26 10.71 1.26 23.07 - 1.57 3.54 11.89 13.66 1/4 .94
M3720 6.50 F16 - - 3/4-10 - 46MM 1.61 6.30 14.17 1.26 26.89 - 1.58 2.96 14.17 15.94 1/2 1.97
19
15-1 UNITORQ TECHNICAL INFORMATION
MODEL 90o 120o 180o K6
M 10 1.00 - - 1.20
M 20 1.98 2.20 2.65 2.20
M 30 2.98 3.26 3.97 3.42
M 52 4.30 4.74 5.95 5.07
M 73 5.51 5.95 7.94 6.39
M 103 7.39 8.16 11.25 8.38 ACTUATOR WEIGHT
M 148 10.58 11.47 13.56 12.79 IN POUNDS
M 222 14.99 16.90 20.68 17.86
M 295 18.74 20.73 26.02 22.49
M 470 31.00 - - 39.80
M 586 34.40 39.69 55.79 42.78
M 900 61.50 - - 83.10
M 1213 68.80 81.14 106.94 86.66
M 2366 132.32 146.63 173.60 180.81
M 2958 160.97 177.60 - 209.48
M 3720 205.00 - - 267.00
MODEL 90o 120o 180o K6
M 10 12.8 - - 6.7
AIR CONSUMPTION M 20 15.3 17.1 28.1 7.3
M 30 22.0 24.4 41.5 9.2
CUBIC INCHES PER CYCLE
M 52 36.6 42.7 68.3 15.3
M 73 52.5 61.0 99.5 22.0
M 103 67.1 82.4 131.2 27.5
M 148 112.9 137.3 189.2 41.5
M 222 152.6 176.9 341.7 67.1
M 295 218.5 241.0 415.0 86.7
M 470 335.6 - - 174.5
M 586 416.2 476.0 790.2 174.5
TYPE CYCLE TIME (Sec.) M 900 762.6 - - 396.7
M 1213 872.6 1013.0 1293.7 360.0
M10 0.123 M 2366 1586.6 1861.2 2471.5 701.8
M20 0.158
M 2958 1922.2 2288.4 - 1037.4
M30 0.214
M52 0.333 M 3720 2955.0 - - 1594.0
M73 0.429
M103 0.444
M148 0.461
M222 0.600 ACTUATOR CYCLE TIME
M295 0.857
90O Actuation
M470 1.280
M586 1.620
M900 2.790 NOTE: STROKE TIME IS EQUAL FOR OPENING AND
M1213 3.330 CLSOING STROKES.
M2366 6.000
M2958 7.500
M3720 9.600
20
16-1 UNITORQ ACTUATOR MATERIAL TABLE
Item # Qty Description Material

1 1 Body Anodized Aluminum
2 1 Piston STD Die Cast Aluminum
3 1 Piston DLS Die Cast Aluminum
4 2 Piston O-Ring Buna N
5 2 Piston Guide Delrin 500
6 1 Piston Skate Delrin 500
7 1 DLS ANSI 304 Stainless Steel
8 1 DLS O-Ring Buna N
9 1 DLS Bearing Delrin 500
10 1 DLS Snap Ring ANSI 304 Stainless Steel
11 Max 12 Spring Cartridge Epoxy Coated Steel
12 1 Snap Ring E.N.P. ASTM B656 Stell
13 1 Pinion Washer Delrin 500
14 1 Upper Pinion O-Ring Buna N
15 1 Upper Pinion Bearing Delrin 500
16 1 Pinion E.N.P. ASTM B656 Steel
17 1 Lower Pinion Bearing Delrin 500
18 1 Lower Pinion O-Ring Buna N
19 2 End Cap Epoxy Coated Aluminum *
20 2 Sealing Nuts ANSI 304 Stainless Stell
21 2 Seal Nut O-Ring Buna N
22 1 Open Travel Stop ANSI 304 Stainless Steel
23 8 End Cap Fastners ANSI 304 Stainless Steel
24 2 End Cap O-Ring Buna N
21
WAR RAN TY
THE SELLER WARRANTS IT'S PRODUCTS AGAINST DEFECTS IN

MATERIAL OR WORKMANSHIP, WHEN USED ON THOSE SERVICES
APPROVED BY THE SELLER, FOR A PERIOD OF TWO YEARS FROM THE DATE
OF ORIGINAL SHIPMENT. THE SELLER'S LIABILITY UNDER THIS WARRANTY
SHALL BE LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AT SELLER'S OPTION OF
SUCH PRODUCTS. F.O.B. FACTORY, UPON PROOF OF DEFECT SATISFACTORY
TO SELLER. SELLER MAKES NO WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE, OR
AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SELLER BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIL DAMAGES OF
ANY NAUTRE, OR LOSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM ANY DEFECIVE
PRODUCTS OR THE USE OF ANY PRODUCT.
22
10
Instruction Manual
For
4.3– Temperature Switch
Tab 11

Copes-Vulcan
Temperature Switches
General Instructions
housing to make threaded connection. Tighten probe hex

fitting with 1-1/8-inch open-end wrench for leak free fit. A
locally customized mounting bracket may be used if more
support is desired. Housings L, S, TA, V1, V2, V3, LC, SC,
BA, B3, B4, B5 and B6 are not recommended for direct
mount where vibration is expected. These housings should
be securely mounted to a flat surface (bulkhead or panel
rack) or pipe stanchion.
Remote-Mount Probe — Capillary

General
1. Secure housing-mounting pad to bulkhead, panel
This instruction provides information for mounting, rack or pipe stanchion with suitable 1/4-inch
electrical connection, process connection, and calibration (6.35 mm) bolts.
of SOR Temperature Switches.
Note: If you suspect that an instrument is defective, IMPORTANT: When mounting to an irregular or
contact the factory or the SOR, Inc. representative in your uneven surface, install rubber washers on bolts
area for a return authorization number. If the instrument between housing and mounting surface (except for
cannot be returned for service, field work should be high vibration applications) to prevent deformation
performed by a qualified instrument technician using of housing, which could change relative positions
factory authorized procedures. Contact the factory or the of internal parts and affect calibration or render
SOR, Inc. representative in your area for technical support. device inoperative.
The SOR, Inc. Temperature Switch consists of a pressure

switch with a sealed temperature sensing bulb attached 2. Mounting by electrical conduit connection is NOT
directly to the pressure port. (An optional remote recommended.
temperature sensing bulb can be connected to the 3. Suggested mounting orientation is electrical
pressure port with an armor-clad capillary.) The conduit connection at 3 or 9 o’clock and sensing
temperature sensing system is pressure filled with a body at 6 o’clock. However, device is not position
volatile fluid. Process temperature changes cause sensitive and can be mounted in any position. If
proportional vapor pressure changes in the temperature breather drain is installed, it must be oriented at 6
sensing bulb that act on the diaphragm/ piston assembly o’clock (pointing down) so condensation will drain.
to actuate and deactuate a snap-action electrical switching It must be kept clear of paint and foreign matter.
element at discrete process temperatures. The instrument’s 4. Carefully insert sensing probe into process
behavior is determined by vapor pressure. (105 range through suitable fitting or thermowell. Adjust
model fill media is inert gas.) desired insertion length. Tighten probe hex fitting
with 7/8” open-end wrench. Tighten 9/16” hex nut
Design and specifications are subject to change without to fingertight. Then hold the 7/8” fitting with a
notice. wrench and tighten the 9/16” hex nut an additional
1-1/4 turns from finger tight. Avoid sharp bends in
Installation capillary.
This product should only be installed by trained and
Process Connection
competent personnel.
Temperature sensing probe is 300 series stainless steel.
Direct-Mount Probe If process is compatible, it may be directly inserted into
The temperature sensing probe is rigidly attached to the the process without use of a thermowell. Best results are
instrument’s body/housing. Carefully insert sensing probe obtained when the probe is completely immersed in the
into process through suitable fitting or thermowell. process. A thermowell increases response time (lag). A
Standard process connection is 1/2-inch NPT(M). Ensure thermowell filled with thermal transfer media reduces lag.
that ample clearance exists before rotating the instrument
For latest revision, see www.sorinc.com
Form 169 (02.09) ©2009 SOR Inc. Registered Quality System to ISO 9001:2000 Page 1 of 8
For instruments with 3/4-inch hex set point adjustment:
Electrical Connection Use 3/4-inch open-end wrench to turn hex adjusting nut
clockwise to increase set point, and counterclockwise to
CAUTION: Switching Element Assembly has been decrease set point. Approximate set point can be obtained
precisely positioned in the housing at the factory for by sighting across top of adjusting nut to calibration scale
optimum performance. Any inadvertent movement or on the housing floor. If precise set point calibration is
replacement in the field will degrade performance and required, it will be necessary to use a regulated thermal
could render the device inoperative, unless factory bath and suitable continuity tester. Consult factory.
authorized procedures are followed.
For instruments with dead band adjustment:
When making electrical connections, use care to apply Use the fixed dead band procedure (above) to calibrate
minimal strain to the electrical switching element. Refer to the desired decreasing temperature set point. The
wiring schematic on reverse for terminal and wire codes. increasing temperature set point can then be adjusted by
Ensure that wiring conforms to all applicable local and turning the white thumbwheel on the electrical switching
national electrical codes and install unit(s) according to element. Setting A yields the smallest possible dead band.
relevant national and local safety codes. Setting F yields the widest possible dead band. Settings
above E may degrade repeatability.
Calibration
Special Conditions for Safe Use for
Disconnect electrical power to temperature switch. Remove ATEX Certified Mini-Hermet
housing cover ( or weathertight cap).
Temperature Switches only
NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect electrical power 1. The terminal box to which the equipment is
with the Big Hermet series or models in B3, B4, B5 and B6 attached must, together with the switch, ensure
housings provided that only the cover fastened with four the requisite thread engagement for Apparatus
captive screws over Set Point adjustment is removed. Group IIC.
WARNING: Units in Hazardous Locations — Prior 2. The reliability of the diaphragm has been
to calibration, make sure that the work area is assessed on the basis of 100,000 operations. The
declassified before removing the explosion proof cover to diaphragm assembly must be changed before this
calibrate the unit. Failure to do so could result in severe number of operations is exceeded.
personal injury or substantial property damage. 3. The permanently attached cables are to be suitably
terminated and protected from impact.
For instruments with 1/8” hex Allen wrench set point 4. When the switch is attached to an increased safety
adjustment under weathertight cap: terminal box the assembly must be capable of
Use 1/8” hex Allen wrench to turn adjusting screw to withstanding the impact test specified in
achieve desired set point. BS 5501: Part 1: 1997.
5. The sealing arrangements must maintain the minimum
CAUTION: Do not unthread the adjusting screw more than lP54 rating required by the increased safety enclosure.
two threads below the flush point of housing as calibration 6. The switch must attach to the enclosure using an
could be adversely affected. existing entry.
Turn adjusting screw clockwise (in) to increase set point
and counterclockwise (out) to decrease set point.
Calibration scale is not installed, so external measurement
of process temperature is necessary. Consult the factory.
Wiring Schematics
Housing Type Conduit Connection Contact Termination Contact Identification
Screw Terminals Stamped on insulation

Open Bracket None
Wire leads Color coded and marked
Screw terminals Stamped on insulation

3/4 NPT(F), M 20 x 1.5 (F),
All others
or 1/2 NPT(M) unless Wire leads Color coded and marked
optional adapter is specified
Terminal strip Stamped on insulation
Page 2 of 8 Form 169 (02.09) ©2009 SOR Inc.

Wiring Lead Code Colors
SPDT DPDT
Blue (C) Blue (C)

Black (NO) Black (NO)
Red (NC) Red (NC)
Yellow (C2)
Brown (NO2)
Orange (NC2)
Green (GND)
Temperature
Green (GND)
NO1 NO2
Temperature
Probe Dimensions
Sensing Bulb Extension 316 SS

Remote Mount 1/2” NPT (M)
12.7
.50
See Housing For “V” Series, see
Dimensions 22.6
Housing Dimensions .89
Temperature Sensing Bulb For All Others, subtract .29

52.3 Sensing Bulb 347 SS for Range 105 from Housing Dimensions
2.06 Extension 3.16 SS 316 SS For all Others
1/2” NPT (M)
Direct Mount
Armored Capillary 263.4 Max
300 Series SS 10.37
308.3
12.06
Approximate Range of Adjustment
Linear = mm
in.
B with NB
Feature A B C D dia.
option
Range All 135,125,115 105 135,125 135,125,115 105 135,125,115 105
Probe m ft mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in.
201 NA NA 105.7 4.16 -- -- 107.2 4.22 128.3 5.05 -- -- 9.7 0.38 -- --
203 1.8 6.0 112.0 4.41 148.3 5.84 112.0 4.41 135 to 396 5.3 to 15.6 170 to 433 6.7 to 17.1 9.7 0.38 16.0 0.63
205 3.0 10.0 124.7 4.91 148.3 5.84 112.0 4.41 147 to 409 5.8 to 16.1 170 to 433 6.7 to 17.1 9.7 0.38 16.0 0.63
207 4.5 15.0 162.8 6.41 148.3 5.84 112.0 4.41 185 to 447 7.3 to 17.6 170 to 433 6.7 to 17.1 9.7 0.38 16.0 0.63
209 6.0 20.0 194.6 7.66 148.3 5.84 112.0 4.41 216 to 480 8.5 to 18.9 170 to 433 6.7 to 17.1 9.7 0.38 16.0 0.63
Form 169 (02.09) ©2009 SOR Inc. Page 3 of 8

General Information for ATEX Certified Models
Adjustable Range Overrange Maximum Process Pressure

Range Designators
°F °C °F °C psi bar
135 -50 to 70 -45 to 21 190 88 2300 158
125 40 to 225 5 to 107 360* 182* 2300 158
115 150 to 375 66 to 190 520 270 2300 158
105** 300 to 1000 150 to 540 1100 590 1000 70
* Overrange temperature decreases to 250oF (120oC) when NB option is specified.

See accessories on page 12.
** Remote mount only.
AC Rating Overrange Maximum Process Pressure

Designator
Volts Amps Volts Amps Volts Amps
AF & AG 250 11 125 0.5 30 5
EF & EG 250 5 125 0.5 30 5
JF & JG 125 1 --- --- 30 1
ATEX Marking Materials

For ATEX Certified Models
Manufacturer’s Thread Form Product Type

Registered Trademark Information Identification
ATEX Listing Product Model Serial Number (First Two Numbers

Information Identification Indicate Year of Manufacture)

Declaration of Conformity
For ATEX Certified Models

Notes

Notes

14685 West 105th Street, Lenexa, Kansas 66215 913-888-2630 Fax 913-888-0767 www.sorinc.com
Page 8 of 8 Printed in the USA Registered Quality System to ISO 9001:2000 Form 169 (02.09) ©2009 SOR Inc.
11
Instruction Manual
For
4.4– Solenoid Valve
Tab 12

Copes-Vulcan
Installation & Maintenance Instructions SERIES
GENERAL PURPOSE/RAINTIGHT/WATERTIGHT AND 8004
RAINTIGHT/WATERTIGHT/EXPLOSIONPROOF SOLENOIDS
Form No.V6796R2
Wiring
NOTICE: See separate valve installation and maintenance Wiring must comply with local codes and the National
instructions for information on: Operation, Positioning, Electrical Code. The solenoid is provided with lead wires and
Mounting, Cleaning, Preventive Maintenance, Causes of one grounding wire which is green or green with a yellow stripe.
Improper Operation, Disassembly and Reassembly of basic To facilitate wiring, the solenoid may be rotated 360_ in 90_
valve. increments. To rotate solenoid, remove retaining cap (if
present) and four mounting screws, reposition solenoid and
DESCRIPTION replace screws and retaining cap (if present). Torque screws
Catalog Numbers 80041, 8004A1, EF80041 and EF8004A1 are evenly in a crisscross manner to 12 in-lbs [1,3 Nm]. Torque
thermoplastic encapsulated pull-type solenoids for use with retaining cap to 10-12 in-lbs [1,1-1,3 Nm] using a 21/32I
ASCO valves. These solenoids have three lead wires with one socket.
wire for grounding and a ½I male conduit connection. Catalog Solenoids have a ½-14 NPT male thread. For connection to
No. 80041 and 8004A1 are designed to meet Enclosure Type rigid metal conduit, metal type NPT electrical fittings should be
1-General Purpose, Types 3 and 3S-Raintight, and Types 4 used. For the watertight and explosionproof solenoid, electriĆ
and 4X-Watertight. Catalog No. EF80041 and EF8004A1 cal fittings must be approved for use in hazardous locations or
meet Enclosure Types 3 and 3S-Raintight, Types 4 and use ASCO Part Number 264568-001.
4X-Watertight, Types 6 and 6P-Submersible, Type 7 (A, B, C, Solenoid Temperature
& D) Explosionproof Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, & D Standard solenoids are designed for continuous duty service.
and Type 9 (E, F, & G)-Dust - Ignitionproof Class II, Division When the solenoid is energized for a long period, the solenoid
1, Groups E, F, & G. becomes hot and can be touched by hand only for an instant.
This is a safe operating temperature.
OPERATION
When the solenoid is energized, the core assembly is drawn into MAINTENANCE
the plugnut/core tube sub-assembly. When the solenoid is WARNING: To prevent the possibility of personal
de-energized, spring force returns the core assembly to the injury or property damage, turn off electrical power,
original position. depressurize valve, and vent fluid to a safe area before
servicing.
Enclosure Types 7 and 9 Only Cleaning
All solenoid valves should be cleaned periodically. The time
CAUTION: To prevent fire or explosion, do not install between cleaning will vary depending on medium and service
solenoid and/or valve where ignition temperature of hazĆ conditions. In general, if the voltage to the solenoid is correct,
ardous atmosphere is less than 160_ C. Open circuit sluggish valve operation, excessive noise, or leakage will indiĆ
before disassembling. cate that cleaning is required. In the extreme case, faulty valve
operation will occur and the valve may fail to shift. Clean
strainer or filter when cleaning the valve.
Temperature Limitations
Preventive Maintenance
Construction S Keep the medium flowing through the solenoid valve as free
Catalog Numbers from dirt and foreign material as possible.
Ambient Temperature
S While in service, the solenoid valve should be operated at least
80041 AC & DC Construction once a month to ensure proper opening and closing.
EF80041 77_ F (25_ C) maximum S Depending on the medium and service conditions, periodic
inspection of internal valve parts for damage or excessive
AC Construction
wear recommended. Thoroughly clean all parts. Replace
8004A1 104_F (40_ C) maximum
any worn or damaged parts.
EF8004A1 DC Construction
77_F (25_C) maximum Causes of Improper Operation
S Faulty Control Circuit: Check the electrical system by
Positioning energizing the solenoid. A metallic click signifies that the
Solenoid may be mounted in any position. solenoid is operating. Absence of the click indicates loss of
power supply. Check for loose or blown fuses,
Valve Mounting open-circuited or grounded solenoid, broken lead wires or
This solenoid is assembled to a valve that must be rigidly supĆ splice connections.
ported using the valve body mounting provisions.
e MCMXCVII All Rights Reserved. Printed in USA Page 1 of 3
ASCO Valves 50-60 Hanover Road, Florham Park, New Jersey 07932
S Burned-Out Solenoid: Check for open-circuited solenoid. ORDERING INFORMATION FOR REPLACEMENT
Check supply voltage; it must be the same as specified on PILOT VALVE WITH SOLENOID
nameplate and marked on the solenoid. Check ambient
temperature and check that the core is not jammed. If Specify valve Catalog Number, Solenoid Catalog Number,
necessary, replace pilot valve. Serial Number, Voltage, and Frequency.
S Low Voltage: Check voltage across the solenoid leads.
Voltage must be at least 85% of rated voltage.
Torque Chart
Part Name Torque Value Inch-Pounds Torque Value Newton-Meters
Mounting screws 12 1,3
Retaining cap 10 - 12 1,1 - 1,3
valve
½-14 NPT
male thread
connection
solenoid
nameplate label
mounting screw (4)
Figure 1. Catalog No. 80041 General Purpose/Raintight/Watertight Solenoid.
valve
½-14 NPT
male thread
connection
solenoid
metal nameplate
mounting screw (4)
Figure 2. Catalog No. EF80041 Raintight/Watertight/Explosionproof Solenoid.
Page 2 of 3 Form No.V6796R2
valve
½-14 NPT male

thread connection
solenoid
nameplate label
retaining cap
(see torque
chart)
mounting screw (4)
Figure 3. Catalog No. 8004A1 general purpose/raintight/watertight solenoid.
valve retaining
cap
ASCO part
No. 264568-001
½-14 NPT male
thread connection
retaining cap
(see torque
chart)
solenoid
metal nameplate
mounting screw (4)
Figure 4. Catalog No. EF8004A1 raintight/watertight/explosionproof solenoid.
Form No.V6796R2 Page 3 of 3
Installation & Maintenance Instructions SERIES
3-WAY OR 4-WAY, 2 POSITION SINGLE OR DUAL SOLENOID VALVES
FOR NAMUR ACTUATORS - 1/4 NPT PRESSURE & 1/8 NPT EXHAUST CONNECTIONS
8551
AIR OR INERT GAS SERVICE - ANODIZED ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION
Form No.V7418
Service Notice OPERATION

Except for coil replacement, the Series 8551 are not repairable. IMPORTANT: Minimum operating pressure differential 30 psi;
When any performance problems are detected during routine maximum 150 psi.
inspection, replace valve immediately. Breather Function 3-way (3/2) mode only: Allows for spring side
For catalog numbers prefixed WT or EF, see separate solenoid of a spring return actuator to vent at all times through valve
installation and maintenance instructions for information on: exhaust port 3.
Wiring, Solenoid Temperature, Cause of Improper Operation
Single Solenoid: This type of operation is used where
and Coil Replacement.
automatic return of the valve on electrical power failure or loss
of main line pressure is required.
DESCRIPTION
3-Way NC Single Solenoid Operation
Series 8551 valves are 3-way or 4-way, 5 ported 2 position
piloted spool type single or dual solenoid valves designed for air Solenoid De-energized: Flow is from port 2 to port 3. Port 4
or inert gas service. Valves are made of rugged anodized is open to exhaust port 3 (breather function); pressure port 1 is
aluminum. A built-in manual operator allows manual closed Slight pilot exhaust is also apparent. Port 5 is not used.
operation when desired or during an electrical power outage. Solenoid Energized: Flow is from pressure port 1 to port 2. Port
Each valve may be used for 3-way (normally closed) or 4-way 4 is open to exhaust port 3 (breather function); pilot exhaust is
operation by using the appropriate flow plate provided. Flow closed.
plates are marked (3/2) for 3 Ports, 2 Positions (3-way
operation) or (5/2) for 5 Ports, 2 Positions (4-way operation). 3-Way Single Solenoid (3/2)
These valves are supplied with all necessary hardware for a
NAMUR direct mount installation i.e. flow plates, gaskets, Solenoid De-energized Solenoid Energized
mounting screws and a locating set screw. See Flow Selection
And Mounting section. Pilot 2 4 Pilot 2 4
Valves catalog numbers prefixed SC are supplied withĂ anĂ Exh. Exh.
open-frame Ăspade plug ĂconnectionĂ coil (3x DIN 46244). A
DIN Plug Connector Kit No. K226061-001, is available from
ASCO. 3 1 5 3 1 5
APPLICATIONS
Typically, the 3-way (3/2) normally closed mode is used for a 4-Way Single Solenoid Operation
single acting (spring return) actuator; 4-way (5/2) mode for a
double acting actuator. Solenoid De-energized: Flow is from pressure port 1 to port
Single-acting Double-acting 4 and from port 2 to port 3. Port 5 is closed. Slight pilot exhaust
actuator actuator is also apparent.
solenoid spoolĆ solenoid spoolĆ Solenoid Energized: Flow is from pressure port 1 to port 2 and
valve control valve control from port 4 to port 5. Port 3 and pilot exhaust are closed.
adapted for adapted for
3/2 operation 5/2 operation 4-Way Single Solenoid (5/2)
Solenoid Solenoid De-energized Solenoid Energized
Pilot
Valve Pilot 2 4 Pilot 2 4
Exh. Exh.
Quarter
Turn 3 1 5 3 1 5
Actuator
Dual Solenoids: Solenoid may be energized momentarily or
continuously depending upon application. Dual solenoid
valves are used where equipment must not change position
Process
when electrical power fails. Valve operates when one solenoid
Valve
is energized and returns when the other solenoid is energized.
Port Markings: 1 = Pressure, 2 & 4 = ĂCylinder ĂĂ
3 & 5 = Exhaust
e MM All Rights Reserved. Printed in U.S.A. Page 1 of 4
ASCO Valves 50-60 Hanover Road, Florham Park, New Jersey 07932 www.ascovalve.com
Metering Device with Filter for 1/8 NPT
CAUTION: Do not energize solenoids A and B
simultaneously, as this will cause valve to malfunction. Connections (Optional Feature)
These metering devices can be used to vary the operating speed
IMPORTANT: Minimum on time for each solenoid is 0.3 of the actuator/cylinder this valve is piloting. Install metering
seconds. devices in 1/8 NPT exhaust connection and tighten securely.
3-Way NC Dual Solenoid Operation Install a metering device in port 3 and port 5 of 4-way (5/2)
valves only. Because of the breather function, the use of a
Solenoid A Last Energized: Flow is from pressure port 1 to port metering device is not recommended for the 3-way (3/2)
2. Port 4 is open to exhaust port 3 (breather function). Slight mode.
pilot exhaust is apparent when solenoid A is de-energized.
Metering Device Adjustment:
Port 5 is not used.
A. ĂLoosen Locknut on adjusting screw.
Solenoid B Last Energized: Flow is from pressure 2 to port 3.
Port 4 is open to exhaust 3 (breather function); pressure port 1 B. ĂTurn adjusting screw clockwise (to reduce flow) as far as
is closed. Slight pilot exhaust is apparent when solenoid B is possible.
C. Turn adjusting screw counterclockwise (to increase
de-energized.
flow)ĂĂno more than two turns.
3-Way Dual Solenoid (3/2) D. Tighten locknut using 13 mm wrench.
Solenoid A" Solenoid B" IMPORTANT: The steps above provide only a rough
Last Energized Last Energized adjustment of the metering device. Final adjustments must be
made with valve fully pressurized in the line of final
Pilot 2 4 Pilot Pilot 2 4 Pilot application.
Exh. Exh. Exh. Exh.
A B A B locknut
3 1 5 3 1 5
4-Way Dual Solenoid Operation adjusting screw

Solenoid A Last Energized: Flow is from pressure port 1 to port
2 and from port 4 to port 5. Port 3 is closed. Slight pilot exhaust
apparent when solenoid A is de-energized. Turn clockwise to reduce flow and speed of
Solenoid B Last Energized: Flow is from pressure port 1 to port actuatory/cylinder this valve is piloting;
4 and from port 2 to port 3. Port 5 is closed. Slight pilot exhaust counterclockwise to increase flow and
apparent when solenoid B is de-energized. speed.
4-Way Dual Solenoid (5/2)
Figure 2. Metering Device (partial view).
Solenoid A" Solenoid B"
Last Energized Last Energized
INSTALLATION
Pilot 2 4 Pilot Pilot 2 4 Pilot Check nameplate for correct catalog number, pressure,
Exh. Exh. Exh. Exh.
voltage, frequency, and service. Never apply incompatible
fluids or exceed pressure rating of the valve. Installation and
A B A B valve maintenance to be performed by qualified personnel.
3 1 5 3 1 5
WARNING: To prevent the possibility of
Manual Operator
electrical shock from the accessibility of live
Manual operator provides manual operation when desired or
during an electrical power outage. To engage manual operator, parts, install the open-frame solenoid in a
rotate screw clockwise as far as possible to 1". Valve will now suitable enclosure.
be in the same position as when the solenoid is energized. To
Future Service Considerations
disengage manual operator, rotate screw counterclockwise as
Provision should be made for performing seat leakage, external
far as possible to 0".
leakage, and operational tests on the valve with a
CAUTION: To prevent malfunction be sure to turn nonhazardous, noncombustible fluid.
screw counterclockwise to 0" before operating valve Temperature Limitations
electrically. For valve ambient and fluid temperature ranges, refer to chart
Clockwise Counterclockwise following. Check catalog number prefix and watt rating on
1
1
To Engage To Disengage nameplate.

0
0
Operating Screw
Figure 1. Manual Operator (partial view).
Page 2 of 4 Form No.V7418
Watt Catalog NOTE: The exhaust and/or pressure lines may be restricted to
Rating Ambient And Fluid control cylinder speed on 4-way (5/2) mode only.
Number
Temperature Range
AC/DC Prefix CAUTION: To protect the solenoid valve, install a
2.5 & 3 strainer or filter, suitable for the service involved, in the
5_F to 140_F
SC inlet side as close to the valve as possible. Clean
AC & DC (-15_C to 60_C)
periodically depending on service conditions. See
5_F to 140_F ASCO Series 8600, 8601, and 8602 for strainers.
WT
6.3 (-15_C to 60_C) Wiring
AC 5_F to 104_F Wiring must comply with local codes and the National
EF Electrical Code. The open-frame solenoid may be rotated
(-15_C to 40_C)
360_. The open-frame solenoid is provided with 1/4I spade
6.9 5_F to 77_F terminals and a grounding spade terminal connection.
WT or EF
DC (-15_C to 25_C) NOTE: Valves can be converted from alternating current (AC)
to direct current (DC), or vice-versa, by changing the coil.
NOTE: For temperatures below 32_F (0_C) moisture-free Solenoid Temperature
air must be used. Series 8551 valves are supplied with coils designed for
Positioning continuous duty service. When the solenoid is energized for a
Valve may be mounted in any position. long period, the solenoid coil becomes hot and can be touched
with the hand only for an instant. This is a safe operating
Flow Selection and Mounting (Refer to Figure 3) temperature. Any excessive heating will be indicated by the
Two flow plates are provided with each valve. Flow plates are smoke and odor of burning coil insulation.
marked (3/2) for 3-way or (5/2) for 4-way. For proper
orientation of the flow plate, the marking (3/2) or (5/2) must be MAINTENANCE
opposite series number 8551 flow diagram label on valve body WARNING: To prevent the possibility of
or facing solenoid B" for dual solenoid construction. See
Figure 3. for proper orientation of flow plate, gaskets,
death, serious injury or property damage, turn off
mounting screws and locating set screw. Then proceed as electrical power, depressurize valve, and vent
follows: fluid to a safe area before inspecting or servicing
1. If required, install locating set screw using a 2 mm hex key the valve.
wrench. Preventive Maintenance
2. Install Port 2 and Port 4 gaskets and flow gasket on flow S Prepare and follow a routine inspection schedule based on
plate. the media, environment, and frequency of use.
3. Position flow plate and solenoid valve on actuator. Then S Keep the medium flowing through the valve as free from dirt
install two socket head cap screws in offset center holes on and foreign material as possible. Depending on medium and
either side. Hand thread screws a few turns into actuator. service conditions, clean valve strainer or filter as required to
Then tighten screws evenly using a 4 mm hex key wrench. keep the valve free of contamination. In the extreme case,
NOTE: Three sets of mounting screws are provided, sizes:M5, contamination will cause faulty valve operation and the valve
.190-24 UNC-2A and .190-32 UNF-2A. may fail to shift.
S While in service, the valve should be operated at least once
Piping a month to ensure proper operation.
There is pilot exhaust from the top of the solenoid when the
solenoid is de-energized. The pilot exhaust may be connected Causes of Improper Operation
to the main exhaust if the air or inert gas cannot be exhausted S Incorrect Pressure: Check valve pressure. Pressure to valve
directly to the atmosphere. An exhaust protector is provided in must be within range specified on nameplate.
S Faulty Control Circuits: Check the electrical system by
the top of the plugnut/core tube assembly to prevent debris
energizing the solenoid. A metallic click signifies that the
from entering pilot exhaust.
solenoid is operating. Absence of the click indicates loss of
Connect piping or tubing to valve according to markings on
power supply. Check for loose or blown fuses,
valve body. Refer to flow diagrams in OPERATION section. open-circuited or grounded coil, broken lead wires or splice
Apply pipe compound sparingly to male pipe threads only. If connections.
applied to valve threads the compound may enter the valve and S Burned-Out Coil: Check for open-circuited coil. Replace
cause operational difficulty. Avoid pipe strain by properly coil as necessary. Check supply voltage; it must be the same
supporting and aligning piping. When tightening the pipe, do as specified on nameplate.
not use valve or solenoid as a lever. Locate wrenches applied S Low Voltage: Check voltage across the coil terminals.
to valve body or piping as close as possible to connection point. Voltage must be at least 85% of nameplate rating
CAUTION: To avoid damage to the valve body, DO Coil Replacement
NOT OVERTIGHTEN PIPE CONNECTIONS. If TEFLON* 1. Disconnect grounding and supply wires from coil.
tape, paste, spray or similar lubricant is used, use extra 2. Remove retaining clip and slip coil off the plugnut/core
care when tightening due to reduced friction. tube assembly.
3. Install new coil and replace retaining clip.
4. Make electrical hookup to coil.
*DuPont's Registered Trademark
Form No.V7418 Page 3 of 4
ORDERING INFORMATION FOR
ASCO COILS OR REPLACEMENT VALVES
retaining clip
When ordering ASCO Coils or Replacement Valves,
specify catalog number, voltage, frequency and coil
coil number, if possible.
mounting screw (2)
valve body assembly

with manual operator
Single Solenoid
series number Construction
(see note)
flow gasket
one flow gasket provided,
flip over to fit 5/2 flow plate.
OR
port 2 & 4
gaskets
Solenoid locating set screw

A mounted in actuator
Use Flow Plate Use Flow Plate
marked 3/2 for marked 5/2 for
3-way operation 4-way operation
(see note) (see note)
series number
(see note)
Solenoid
B Note: Flow marking 3/2 or 5/2 must
be at opposite end of valve series
number 8551.
flow plate marking
to face Solenoid B
Dual Solenoid
Construction
Figure 3. Series 8551 shown with prefix SC coil.
Page 4 of 4 Form No.V7418
SCIENTIFIC
50 Hanover Road 1561 Columbia Highway 50 Hanover Road
Florham Park, New Jersey 07932 Aiken, South Carolina 29801 Florham Park, New Jersey 07932 MMIl All Rights Reserved. Printed in U.S.A. Form No. V6950R5
Tel. (973) 966-2000 Tel. (803) 641-9200 Tel. (973) 236-6160
Fax (973) 966 2628 Fax (803) 641-9290 Fax (973) 966 6461 50 Hanover Road, Florham Park, New Jersey 07932 www.ascovalve.com Page 1 of 2
ASCOMATICA S.A. de C.V. ASCO Valve Canada ASCOTECH S.A. de C.V.
Bosques de Duraznos No. 65-1003A P.O. Box 160 (Airport Road) Circuito Del Progreso No.27
Fraccionamiento Bosques de las Lomas Brantford, Ontario N3T 5M8 Parque Industrial Progreso
Delegacion Miguel Hildago Tel: (519) 758-2700 Mexicali, B.C. Mexico MMIl All Rights Reserved. Form No. 6950R5
Mexico, D.F. CP11700 Fax: (519)758-5540 Tel: (011)-52-686-559-8500
Tel: (52)-55-5596-7741 Fax: (011)-52-686-559-8548 50 Hanover Road, Florham Park, New Jersey 07932 Page 2 of 2
Fax: (52)-55-5596-7719 www.ascovalve.com Printed in U.S.A.
12
Instruction Manual
For
4.5 – Isolation (Gate) Valves
Tab 13

Copes-Vulcan
Vogt Forged Steel
Gate, Globe and
Check Valves
F C D V V E N I M 2 0 0 0 - 02 Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual
Vogt Valves
Flow Control
Vogt Valves
Table of Contents
1 Recommended Spare Parts for Flowserve Vogt Valves 7
1.1 Packing and Gaskets 7
1.2 Bonnet Replacement Assemblies 10
2 Valve Selection 11
2.1 Introduction 11
2.2 Gate Valve Limitations 12
2.3 Globe Valve Limitations 12
2.4 Check Valve Limitations 12
2.5 Pressure/Temperature Rating 12
2.6 Bending Strength 12
2.7 Fire Safety 13
2.8 Pressure Surge 13
2.9 Throttling Service 13
2.10 Temperature Changes 13
2.11 Trapped Pressure 14
2.12 Material Compatibility 14
2.13 Operating Effort 14
3 Shipping And Storage 15
3.1 Introduction 15
3.2 Handling 15
3.3 Storage – Short Term Recommendations 16
3.4 Storage – Long Term Recommendations 16
4 Installation 17
4.1 Introduction(1) 17
4.2 Inspection 17
4.3 Valve Identification 18
4.4 Threaded Valve – Pipe Assembly 18
4.5 Flanged Joint Assembly 18
4.6 Weld Joint Assembly 19
4.7 Recommendations for Field Welding
of Small Carbon Steel Socket Weld Valves 20
of Small Alloy Steel Socket Weld Valves 20
of Small Stainless Steel Socket Weld Valves 21
4.10 Postweld Heat Treat (PWHT) Recommendations 22
4.11 Testing and Adjustment 24
FCD VVENIM2000-02 Forged Steel Gate, Globe and Check Valves 3

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
Table of Contents
5 Operation and Maintenance 25
5.1 Introduction 25
5.2 Operation – Manual Valves 25
5.3 Operation – Power Actuated Valves 26
5.4 Fluid Dynamics of Shutoff Valve Operation 27
5.5 Check Valves 27
5.6 Noise 28
5.7 Maintenance 28
5.8 Valve Maintenance 29
5.9 Routine Inspection and Maintenance 30
5.10 Major Field Repair 30
5.11 Care and Maintenance of Vogt Forged Steel Valves 30
5.12 Detailed Packing Instructions 32
5.13 Fluoropolymer Packing Instructions 34
5.14 Vogt Valves Packed With Fluoropolymer
for High-Pressure Applications – Standard 35
5.15 For Vacuum Applications 35
5.16 For Combination Pressure/Vacuum Applications 35
5.17 Style C-VH Rings for High-Pressure Service 35
5.18 Disc and Seat 37
5.19 Gate Valve Maintenance 38
5.20 Globe Valve Maintenance 38
5.21 Check Valve Maintenance 40
5.22 Vogt Motor-Operated Valve (MOV)
Installation and Maintenance Instruction 42
5.23 Vogt Air-Operated Valve (AOV)
Installation and Maintenance Instruction 44
5.24 Vogt Valve Lubrication Points 46
5.25 Engineering Information 48
4 Forged Steel Gate, Globe and Check Valves FCD VVENIM2000-02

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
Figures
Figure 1 – Series 21000 – A105/13 CR Trim (Gasket Included) 10
Figure 2 – Vogt Valves PED Valve Nameplate 18
Figure 3 – Stuffing Box: Standard and High Pressure Applications 36
Figure 4 – Stuffing Box: Vacuum Applications 36
Figure 5 – Stuffing Box: Combined Pressure/Vacuum Applications 36
Figure 6 37
Figure 7 37
Figure 8 – Gate Valve Top Works (no grease fitting) 47
Figure 9 – Gate Valve Top Works (single grease fitting) 47
Figure 10 – API-600 Gate Valve Top Works
(double grease fittings) 47
Figure 11 – Globe Valve Top Works (no grease fitting) 47
Figure 12 – Globe Valve (single grease fitting) 48
Figure 13 – Globe Valve Stacked Disc 48
Tables
Packing Set Part Numbers 8
Gasket Matrix (Spiral-wound Type) 8
Gasket Part Numbers 9
Usage Table 9
Recommended Valve Orientation 23
Standard and High Pressure Applications 36
Combined Pressure/Vacuum Applications 36
Check Valve Cracking/Opening Pressures 48
Maximum Packing Gland Bolting Torque (ft-lb) 48
Maximum Handwheel Closing Torques, Typical (ft-lb) 49
Recommended Maximum Bonnet Bolt Torques 49

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
This page is intentionally blank.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
1 Recommended Spare Parts

for Flowserve Vogt Valves
1.1 Packing and Gaskets valves. The following matrix and part number tables provide the de-
tails for the purchasing of replacement gaskets for your Vogt bolted
A high degree of standardization of Flowserve Vogt valves permits a
bonnet valves and packing for our popular class 150, 300, 600, 800,
small stock of replacement packing and gaskets to service your Vogt
1500, 1690, and 2680 gate, globe and angle valves.*
Packing Matrix
Pressure NPS 1/2 3/4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 4
Class DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100
150 Conventional Port B B C D D E F F G
800 Conventional Port B* B C D D E F F —
1500 Conventional Port J J D E E F — — —
600 and 800 Full Port B C D — E F — — —
1500 Full Port B D E E F — — — —
Class 800 LTD Class C C D — F F — — —
Class 1690 LTD Class C C E — G G — — —
Class 2680 LTD Class C E E — G G — — —
*Also 1/4 and 3/8 sizes.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
Packing Set Part Numbers

Flexible Graphite Fluoropolymer
Packing Set Packing Cartridge Packing Set
Matrix PN** PN*** PN**
B 55163 55175 55276
C 55166 55176 55286
D 55167 55177 55287
E 55169 55178 55288
F 55170 — 55289
G 55171 — 55285
J 55165 55179 55294
*API 602/ASME B16.34 type valves—see valve description. For other
valves consult your Flowserve distributor.
**Order packing by Packing Set PN. Individual rings of complete set will be
supplied.
***One-piece or two-piece Packing Cartridge will be supplied when this PN
is used.
Gasket Matrix (Spiral-wound Type)

Pressure Class NPS 1/2 3/4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 4
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100
150 Conventional Port A A B C C D E E F
800 Conventional Port A* A B C C D E E —
1500 Conventional Port A A B C C D — — —
600 & 800 Full Port A B G — D E — — —
1500 Full Port A B C C D — — — —
*Also 1/4 and 3/8 sizes.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
Gasket Part Numbers

Spiral-Wound
Gasket Matrix Part Number Gasket Description**
55002 304/Graphite-filled
A 55004 316/fluoropolymer-filled
55005 Monel/Graphite-filled
55006 Monel/fluoropolymer-filled
B 55009 16/fluoropolymer-filled
C 55027 316/fluoropolymer-filled
D 55019 316/fluoropolymer-filled
E 55032 316/fluoropolymer-filled
F 55044 316/fluoropolymer-filled
— Monel/fluoropolymer-filled
G 55014 316/fluoropolymer-filled
Usage Table
Gasket Where Used
304/Graphite A105, A182-F5, F9, F11 Cl 2, F22 Cl 3 Valves
316/Graphite A182, F316 Valves
316/fluoropolymer “T” Suffix Trimmed Valves
Monel/Graphite MM & HF Acid Trimmed Valves
Monel/fluoropolymer Chlorine Valves

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
1.2 Bonnet Replacement The Replacement Bonnet Assembly Package can be easily installed
on most existing in-line Compact Design Gate Valves in Classes
Assemblies 150,300, 600, and 800, of A105 bolted bonnet design with 13 Cr.
trim. Specify the desired replacement Bonnet Assembly Package
Series 21000 – Vogt Valve Replacement Bonnet Subassemblies
for the valve size and series you intend to repack by replacing the
Some valve end-users find it more expedient to replace the bonnet
bonnet subassembly.
subassembly, complete with new packing, when repacking small-
bore valves. To support this maintenance philosophy, Vogt valve Figure 1 – Series 21000 – A105/13 CR Trim (Gasket Included)
users may purchaseA105 bonnet subassemblies for replacement on
Jamb Nut E
their Vogt valves by specifying the Series Number noted below. The
removed bonnet assemblies, if not damaged and still serviceable, Handwheel
can be repacked in a valve repair shop environment and be used
during a later valve repacking cycle. Yoke Nut Gland Bolting
• Repacking made easy Bearing Ring Packing

Packing Gland
• Promotes quick change
Stem
• Completely packed and ready to install Yoke Bonnet
• Supports valve repacking in valve shop environment Gasket
• High degree of standardization permits retrofitting of popular Vogt
Class 150, 300,600, and 800, 13 Cr. trimmed, bolted bonnet valves.
Order by this number

Retrofit Bonnet Assembly Handwheel Diameter
Valve Size Valve Series No. Package Series No. E
1/2, 3/4 353, 363, 373,12111, SW12111,12161, SW12161 21000 04 4.00
1 353, 363, 373,12111, SW12111,12161, SW12161 21000 06 4.75
11/4, 11/2 353, 363, 373,12111, SW12111,12161, SW12161 21000 08 5.75
2 353, 363, 373,12111, SW12111, 12161, SW12161 21000 09 7.00
Consult Flowserve for Vogt’s installation procedure covering instructions for proper field replacement of the series 21000 replacement bonnet subassemblies.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
2 Valve Selection
2.1 Introduction The purpose of this publication is to supply detailed information that

relates specifically to selection, storage, installation, operation, and
Flowserve Vogt Valves, is a world leader in the manufacture of
maintenance of Vogt gate, globe and check valves.
forged steel, alloy steel, and stainless steel gate, globe and check
valves. Since Vogt valves are used for a variety of applications Flowserve Vogt Valves endorses the recommendations outlined in
and in various operating environments, it is reasonable to expect the following source as it pertains specifically to the selection, ship-
that the performance of a valve will reflect upon its selection and ping, storage, installation, operation and maintenance of Vogt gate,
suitability for the specific service as well as proper installation globe and check valves:
and maintenance. As a long time member of the Manufacturers MSS SP 92, Current Edition, MSS Valve User Guide, available through
Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fitting Industry, Inc., Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.,
Vogt engineers have participated in the development of MSS SP 127 Park Street NE, Vienna, VA 22180-4602. Tel: 703-281-6613. Information
in this Operation, Maintenance and Instruction Manual that was extracted
92, MSS Valve User Guide. This guide was developed to recognize from MSS SP 92, was done so with the permission of the MSS, and shall be
and offer recommendations to correct operating problems involving denoted by footnote(1). Copies of the Standard Practice 92 are available from
MSS by request.
industrial valves that were not properly selected for the intended
service, or were adversely affected by improper handling, installa-
tion, operation, or maintenance.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
2.2 Gate Valve Limitations 2.5 Pressure/Temperature Rating

• Do not use for flow regulation or throttling. Proper selection of the pressure/temperature rating of the valve
shall meet service requirements. If the valve application involves
• Do not use if frequent manual operation is required.
temperatures above 100°F (38°C), then the valve pressure rating at
• Do not use for slurries or fluids containing solids that can build up the service temperature must be verified to meet the requirements of
in valve cavities. the application.
• When packed or gasketed with low melting point materials such If system testing will subject the valve to a pressure in excess of
as fluoropolymer the full shell pressure/temperature rating and its working pressure rating, then the intended testing pressure and
fire-safe design are sacrificed. a statement explaining whether the test pressure is through the
opened valve or a differential across the closed valve, should be
• Locked-in volume when closed. included in the purchase specification.
Source Reference for Vogt valves pressure/temperature ratings

2.3 Globe Valve Limitations ASME B16.34 Valves, Flanged, Threaded, and Welded End
VVACT0000, Vogt Catalog.
• Do not use if full flow at minimal pressure drop is required.
• Do not use for slurries or fluids containing solids that can build up
in valve cavities. 2.6 Bending Strength
• When packed or gasketed with low melting point materials such Piping systems are subject to mechanical constraints at fixed
as fluoropolymer the full shell pressure/temperature rating and support points such as rigid nozzles, anchors, etc. Cold springing
fire-safe design are sacrificed. at assembly, system temperature changes, together with gravity,
possible inertia loads, landslides, non-uniform subsidence in buried
lines, etc., all potentially affect the bending moment at various points
2.4 Check Valve Limitations in the piping. (1)
• Must be installed to agree with flow arrow on body. Valves are also subjected to the bending moment occurring in the
adjacent pipe that is in addition to the normal pressure loading.
• Zero leakage of metal-to-metal check valves cannot be readily
Bending loads can cause deformation in valve bodies that can be det-
achieved without an elastomeric element in the seating arrange-
rimental to valve performance. It is therefore a recommended design
ment.
practice to avoid locating valves at points of large bending loads. (1)
• Sizing and pressure drop is critical to ensure full lift of valve
Class 150, 300, 600 and 800 Vogt valves have bodies with a nozzle
piston.
section modulus (I/C) greater than Schedule 80 pipe. Class 1500
• Use swing check valve design for “boiler feedwater” and other Vogt valve bodies have I/C section modulus greater than that of
services where internal rusting may occur in service. Schedule 160 pipe. If the connecting pipe meets the above or has
a lesser wall thickness, it is expected that the piping would be the
• Use spring-controlled lift check valve for compressor service.
weaker element when connected to a Vogt valve and exposed to a
• Size non-spring control lift check valves so that a minimum 2 psi bending load. If the schedule pipe to be used with the Vogt valves are
pressure drop is achieved. greater than the above (pipe has a heavier wall thickness), the pur-
chase order shall denote this and Flowserve will provide an I/C sec-
• Size swing check valve so that a minimum 0.5 psi drop is tion modulus calculation for the valve body/adjoining pipe to ensure
achieved. the piping is the weaker element, or will advise customer otherwise.
• Use swing check valves when maximum flow at minimal pressure (1)
Paragraph extracted from MSS SP 92.
drop desired.
• Do not use for slurries or fluids containing solids that can build up
in valve cavities.
• When gasketed with low melting point materials such as fluo-

ropolymer the full shell pressure/temperature rating and fire-safe
design are sacrificed.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
2.7 Fire Safety 2.9 Throttling Service

Flowserve Vogt Valves all metal-seated gate, globe and check valves Flow control (throttling) valves may be subject to extreme fluid
come standard with flexible graphite packing and gaskets and are of turbulence that may create a high-energy conversion within the valve
a fire-safe design. If these valves are supplied with low melting point and associated piping system. High noise levels usually indicate this
packing, or gaskets, such as fluoropolymer or elastomeric seals energy conversion, either by cavitation of liquids or by shock waves
for sealing, the fire-safe design and full shell pressure/temperature from gases.
ratings are sacrificed.
Therefore, it is possible to damage the valve and piping system when
The purchase order should indicate when the customer requires the throttling of liquid flow results in severe and continuous cavita-
fire-safe designs. tion conditions. Likewise, with gas flow under severe throttling con-
ditions, shock waves can possibly result in damage to the system.
Vogt “flow control valves” should be used when the user requires
2.8 Pressure Surge true flow regulation. Flowserve Vogt Valves should be consulted on
Closure of a valve in a flowing fluid line causes the velocity of the proper valve selection for throttling and/or flow control applications.
fluid to be reduced to zero. If the fluid is a relatively incompressible
liquid, the inertia of an upstream column produces a pressure surge
at the valve whose magnitude is inversely proportional to the time
required for closure. The surge pressure is also proportional to the
2.10 Temperature Changes
Forged steel expands and contracts with rising and falling tem-
length of the upstream fluid column and the fluid velocity prior to
peratures, and in general, an increase in temperature results in a
closure initiation. If the application involves a long upstream line,
decrease of mechanical strength that is regained on return to a lower
a long downstream line, high velocity, or rapid closure, singly or in
temperature. A temperature gradient in a steel part may impose
any combination, the possibility of an unacceptable pressure surge
significant thermal stresses or deformity with a possible negative
should be investigated. (1)
effect on valve performance.
Also to be considered are condensation-induced pressure surges
Frequent temperature cycling may result in development of thermal
which occur when a fluid velocity change is caused by rapid conden-
stress fatigue. Any one or a combination of the following increases
sation or when a slug of water is accelerated by contact with steam.
this possibility:
An example would be when condensate collects on one side of a
closed valve that has steam on the other side, then opening the valve An increase in temperature range, level, rate of change, an
will cause collapsing steam voids, sharp pressure surges and accel- increase in the metal section thickness, or number of cycles.
eration of condensate slugs. Condensation-induced pressure waves
can result in pressure pulses that are significantly higher than those Thermal cycling has been determined to increase the tendency
produced by a sudden valve closure. In such events, non-shock for stem seal leakage.
rated gray iron valves installed in steel piping systems are particu-
larly vulnerable to catastrophic failure. Traps are required to prevent
condensate accumulation and “blow-off” valves located at the low
point in the system are needed to ensure condensate drainage.
Operation and maintenance personnel must be aware of the function
of these devices in relationship to the “shut-off” valve operation and
the necessity for their being in proper working order. (1)
(1)

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
2.11 Trapped Pressure Flowserve Vogt Valves has construction procedures for valves used
in various applications, one being “food service”. These procedures
When a closed valve containing liquid is heated (e.g., from process
ensure that valve materials, and lubrication used in manufacture are
condition, radiation or solar heating) the cavity pressure will increase
compatible with food standards. Flowserve should be consulted on
due to volumetric expansion or vaporization of the liquid. Conversely,
proper valve selection when applications require special cleanliness,
cooling an un-drained cavity below the freezing point may also result
materials and/or lubricants.
in volumetric expansion of the media. These types of expansion can
result in extremely high pressures in the valve. (1)
A bonnet cavity relief can be added to Vogt gate valves when the 2.13 Operating Effort
user determines that the conditions for over-pressurization of the Vogt valves are designed to require a reasonable amount of physical
“locked-in bonnet cavity” exist. Globe and check valves do not have effort applied to a handwheel to open or close at rated working pres-
a “locked-in volume” when the valves are closed and are not subject sure. Maximum handwheel torques at maximum pressure ratings
to this trapped pressure. are listed in Section 5 of this manual.
(1)
2.12 Material Compatibility

It is significant that forged valve materials and lubricants used in
construction be chemically consistent or compatible with the con-
necting piping system components, line fluids, applications and the
environment. Flowserve, or the system design engineers, should be
consulted whenever there appears to be reason for such concern.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
3
3.1 Introduction
Shipping And Storage
3.2 Handling
Flowserve recognizes the importance of maintaining the as-built Appropriate care in handling valves should be complementary to the
condition of valves, and has prepared this section to call attention to degree of protection provided in preparation for transport. A basic
important considerations in the handling of valves prior to installation. consideration in handling valves should be to avoid damaging the
protection provided for shipment. An obvious general rule is that
Vogt forged steel valves are tested and shipped ready for installa-
valves should never be thrown or dropped. It is advisable to keep the
tion. These valves are well-designed, fabricated under an ISO 9001
valve(s) in the shipping containers until the valve is to be installed.
Quality Program, and inspected and tested to provide years of
satisfactory service. Vogt valves can withstand a variety of damages Vogt valves are carefully made from selected materials to give long,
caused by impact, shock or incursion of detrimental materials after trouble-free service when properly installed in applications for which
installation. However, the intermediate period between the factory they were designed. Proper care and maintenance in the field can
production tests and the installation in the end-user’s pipeline may contribute significantly to maximum performance.
involve exposure to damage during shipping that may adversely
The care the valve receives between the time it is shipped by the
affect the subsequent service performance of the valves.
manufacturer and installed in the piping system is important. During
Vogt valves are packaged to rigorous procedures, depending upon this period, the valve can be handled many times and can be kept
end-user specifications, and are padded and boxed for full protection in storage for long periods. Industrial valves are not delicate, but
during shipment to our customers. they are mechanical devices, which should be treated as such and
handled with care.
Attention to the recommendations and cautions here will provide
enhanced assurance of a satisfactory valve when installed.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
Flowserve always provides valves with appropriate end covers to The storage area should be located and constructed so that it will not
protect the end connections and to prevent foreign material from be subject to flooding. The floor should be paved or equal and well
entering the valve. In addition, small valves are shipped in sealed drained.
cartons while larger valves are usually palletized. If at all practical,
Place individual valves or other product separated from its shipment
keep the valves in the cartons or on the pallets with end covers in
pallet and/or box on pallets or shoring to permit air circulation. Keep
place until ready to be installed. Storing the valves off the ground
the valve flow ports sealed with the Vogt-supplied plugs and/or
and indoors is always preferable. When stored outside, valves
covers.
should be off the ground and protected by a weatherproof cover.
If outdoor storage is unavoidable, support products off the ground
or pavement, protected by a watertight enclosure.
3.3 Storage – Short Term Weatherproof covering, when used for outdoor storage, should be
Recommendations a flame-resistant type of sheeting or tarpaulins. Place them so as to
provide drainage and to ensure air circulation to minimize condensa-
Following acceptance testing and inspection at the factory, Vogt
tion. Tie them down to prevent moisture from entering laps and to
products are moved to storage. During movement to storage, Vogt
protect the covering from wind damage.
products are protected from rain and snow, stored in a building that
is provided with uniform heating and cooling control, and outdoor Since Vogt Valves’ packing and gaskets have an indefinite shelf life,
storage is not permitted. valves may be removed from storage and installed without further
preparation. This procedure shall be supplemented with valve motor
Store products away from exposure to the outside environment,
and/or air cylinder manufacturer’s storage recommendations for
airborne contaminants, acceleration forces, and physical damage.
Vogt valves modified with motor or air cylinder valve actuators.
Store products within a fire-resistant, weathertight, and well-
ventilated building or equivalent enclosure. This area should be
situated and constructed so that it is not be subject to flooding; the
floor should be paved or equal, and well drained.
Place items on pallets or shoring to permit air circulation. This area

should be provided with uniform heating and temperature control or
its equivalent to prevent condensation and corrosion.
Do not remove valve end protectors unless necessary for inspection

and installation.
3.4 Storage – Long Term

Recommendations
Keep Vogt Valves products in the as-shipped pallets and/or boxes
as long as practical. Do not remove valve end protectors unless
necessary for inspection and installation.
Upon receipt, inspect pallet and/or boxes for handling damage

and/or exposure to rain and/or ocean spray. Report damage to the
transport agent.
Store the pallets and/or boxes for protection against the weather.
Ideally products should be kept indoors with actual storage
temperature always higher than the dew point.
The storage area should be a fire-resistant, tear-resistant,

weathertight, and well-ventilated building or equivalent enclosure.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
4 Installation
4.1 Introduction(1) 4.2 Inspection

A most critical point in time in the life of an industrial valve is instal- Prior to installation, the following inspections are recommended:
lation. The possibilities for degradation of the valve are numerous.
• Valve(s) and nameplates should be checked for proper
Conversely, the exercise of proper care in this process will assure
identification to be sure the valve is the proper type and of a
increased probability of trouble-free valve service.
suitable pressure class.
This Section has been prepared in order to provide useful informa-
• Check the handwheel jamb nut to ensure that it is tight. After
tion, warnings and reminders, in a format that will be helpful to all
installation, periodically check the nut to ensure tightness.
concerned. A judicious selection of these pages, delivered to the
installation site with the valve itself, will provide the opportunity • Actuate the valve full-open to full-closed to check for possible
for the person having the greatest need to know to be informed or damage from shipping and handling.
reminded of what is most important at the time such information can
be the most useful. • It is extremely important to inspect the interior of both the valve
and the adjoining pipe for cleanliness, because foreign material in
(1)
the line is the major cause of seat leakage and seat damage.
• Make a point of noting any special warning tags or plates attached

to or accompanying the valve and take any appropriate action.
• Verify any marking indicating flow direction. Make sure that

the valve is installed in the proper flow orientation when a flow
direction is indicated on the valve.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
• Inspect end connections to be sure that pipe threads and flange a) Check the threads on both the valve and the mating pipe for cor-
faces are free from scratches, nicks, or dents. rect thread form and cleanliness. Be alert for any indication of an
impact that might have deformed the thread either out-of-round
a CAUTION: Vogt valves are shipped with plastic threaded or by a local indentation. Be sure no chips or grit are present.
or welding end protectors. During inspection for
installation, make sure these protectors have not been b) Note the internal length of the threads in the valve ends and the
mishandled and displaced into the valve interior. If so proximity of the valve internal seat to make sure the pipe end will
they must be removed. not hit the seat when assembled. If there appears to be a pos-
sibility of a problem, carefully check the pipe end thread to make
sure there is no extended straight portion beyond the standard
tapered section.
4.3 Valve Identification c) Apply an appropriate thread tape or thread compound to the
All valves have a nameplate attached to the handwheel that include
external pipe threads except when dry seal threading is speci-
the series number, size, pressure class and material. The valve
fied. Avoid getting the thread tape or thread compound into the
nameplate needs to be reviewed in conjunction with the installation,
internal flow area.
maintenance, and spare parts ordering instructions in this manual.
d) Use care to align the threads at the point of assembly. Tapered
Valves Constructed Under The European Pressure Equipment
pipe threads are inherently a loose fit at entry. Substantial
Directive (PED)
wrenching force should not be applied until it is apparent that
A nameplate attached to the valve (as noted in the Illustration below)
the threads are properly engaged.
shall identify all Vogt PED Category III valves. This nameplate shall
be placed on the valve at the factory. In addition to the nameplate, e) Assemble the joint wrench-tight. The wrench on the valve should
the Vogt PED valve will also have a lot tag to identify the date of be on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded.
manufacture. All nameplates for Category III valves shall have the
CE-mark and shall also include the Notified Body Number. a CAUTION: Because there is no clear limit on the torque
that may be developed in a tapered thread joint, it is
possible to damage the valves or piping by applying
Figure 2 – Vogt Valves PED Valve Nameplate excessive twisting forces through the body of the valve.
If at all possible a wrench should be used on the same
end of the valve to which the pipe is being threaded into.
This way the torque load will not be applied throughout
the valve body.
f) Repeat the process at the second valve end. Again, apply the
wrench at end of the valve to which the pipe is being assembled.
4.5 Flanged Joint Assembly

Flanged joints depend on compressive deformation of the gasket
material between the facing flange surfaces for tight sealing. The
bolting must provide the mechanical force necessary to maintain
the compressive stresses on the gasket, as well as resist the normal
4.4 Threaded Valve – Pipe pressure forces tending to separate the joint. It should be recognized
that with “brute force” alignment of misaligned flanges, sufficient
Assembly bolting force may not be available to sustain the required gasket
Threaded pipe joints depend on a good fit between the external and loading and to resist the load caused by the pressure separating
internal pipe threads for tight sealing. Usually, a compatible soft or force, resulting in a joint leakage problem. The following practices
viscous material is used between the assembled threads to assist should be observed for satisfactory flange joint make-up:
in ensuring a leak-free seal. The following installation practices are
a) Check the mating flange facings. Do not attempt to assemble
recommended:
the flanges if a condition is found which might cause leakage

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
(e.g., a deep radial groove cut by a retracting cutting tool or a

dent across the face caused by mishandling), until the condition
4.6 Weld Joint Assembly
Welded joints that are properly made provide a structural and
is corrected.
metallurgical continuity between the pipe and the valve body. It is
b) Check the bolting for proper size, length, and material. A carbon important that the joint should not constitute a “notch” or “weak
steel bolt on a high-temperature flange joint can result in early link” in the pipe-valve-pipe assembly. Therefore, the weld fillet for
joint failure. High-strength material is always required for flange socket weld joints must always have more cross sectional area than
bolting on steel flanges Class 400 or higher. Such bolting is the pipe.
usually stamped “B-7” on the end, but other grades may be
Butt weld joints require full-penetration welds and a weld thickness
used in some cases. The proper matching of flanges, bolting
at least equal to that of the pipe. Welding a pipe of a high strength
and gaskets is important. Specific requirements of ASME B16.5
alloy to a valve with body material of lower mechanical strength
should be satisfied. Low-strength bolting may be used for lower-
requires that the weld taper to a compensating greater thickness at
pressure flanges, Classes 150 and 300 for operating tempera-
the valve end.
tures not exceeding 400°F (204°C), when using approved gasket
materials. See ASME B16.5 for gasket specification. Sound welds are obviously important.
c) Check the gasket materials. See ASME B16.5 for additional

a CAUTION: This guide is not a complete welding instruction.
requirements for flange joints using low-strength bolting, (e.g.,
All welding should be in accordance with any Code or ju-
gray iron flanges or Class 150 steel flanges). Metal gaskets (flat,
risdictional regulations applicable to the construction of the
grooved, jacketed, corrugated, or spiral-wound), should not be
piping system. The welds must be made following approved
used with these flanges.
welding procedures and be inspected as required by all ap-
d) Check the gaskets for freedom from defects or damage. plicable specifications. The following points are intended to
be helpful as point-of-use reminders of important require-
e) Use care to provide good alignment of the flanges being as- ments of good welding practice:
sembled. Use suitable lubricants on the bolt threads. Sequence
the bolt tightening to make the initial contact of the flanges a) Consult the manufacturer for the correct installation procedure of
and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Tighten the bolts a metal-seated valve prior to pre-heating, welding and postweld
gradually and uniformly to avoid the tendency to twist one flange heat treatment of a butt weld or socket weld valve. To avoid the
relative to the other. Use of a torque wrench is helpful to ensure possibility of arcing always attach the ground directly to the body.
correct and uniform final tightening of the flange bolting. Parallel
alignment of flanges is especially important when assembling b) Consult the manufacturer for the correct installation procedure
a valve into an existing system. It should be recognized that if before welding a soft-seated valve into a line. As a minimum, a
the flanges are not parallel, then it would be necessary to bend soft-seated ball or plug valve should be in the full-open position
something to make the flange joint tight. Simply forcing the prior to welding to prevent seat damage and/or weld splatter
flanges together with the bolting may bend the pipe or it may from adhering to the ball or plug. A means for venting the ball
bend the valve. This is particularly true in large diameter piping. cavity is recommended to relieve any fluid pressure that might
Such conditions should always be brought to the attention of develop due to thermal effects.
someone capable of evaluating the bending condition and the c) Check materials marking on the pipe and valve to confirm that
corrective measures that need to be taken. The assembly of they are as specified.
certain “short pattern” valves between mating flanges requires
that the installation be checked for any possibility of interference d) Inspect the welding end surfaces for dimensions and cleanli-
between the moving parts of the valve and the adjacent pipe, ness. Correct any condition that might interfere with assembly
fitting, or valve. and satisfactory welding.
e) Check all backing rings that may be used to confirm that the ring
a CAUTION: Torque wrenches should always be used to
material is compatible with the pipe and valve materials and that
assure proper tightening of the flange bolting. If, in the
the individual rings fit and are clean.
tightening process, the torque on a given bolt has been
increasing with each part turn and then is observed to f) Determine that all required welding parameters, including pre-
remain unchanged or increase a much lesser amount heating and postweld heat treating, are in accordance with the
with an additional part turn, that bolt is yielding. That approved welding procedure.
bolt should be replaced and scrapped since it is no
g) Inspect the “valve to pipe end” alignment and adjust as required.
longer capable of maintaining the proper preload.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
h) Securely tack weld the mating parts when required if part of the proven, through testing, that he can make a good weld. Care
approved procedure. should be taken in comparing the welder’s qualification with the
code requirements to assure that the welder has qualified with
i) Complete the weld using the approved welding procedure.
an appropriate test for the intended production weld.
j) Clean and inspect the finished weld.
5. Joint Cleanliness The area in-way-of welding should be
k) Repair any defects using an approved weld repair procedure cleaned to remove rust, scale, dirt, oil, and protective coatings.
when necessary. This should be done prior to fit-up or residue in the joint overlap
will not be removed. Sanding, grinding, or wire brushing is usu-
a CAUTION: For welding end zero leak check valves, ally adequate. Solvents may be necessary, if oil is to be removed.
the valve’s piston, or check disk along with the o-ring 6. Fit-up (Socket Weld Valves) In order to gauge fillet weld size
should be removed, by removing the valve cover, prior after welding place a circumferential mark 1" from the engaging
to welding the check valve into the pipe line. A spare pipe end prior to welding. Bottom out the pipe engagement into
cover gasket should be ordered to accommodate this the socket and pull it back approximately 1/16" to allow for weld
process. Care should be taken to prevent foreign debris shrinkage. Note the dimension from the mark to the valve pipe
from entering the valve during the installation process. end.
Cover bolting should be tightened to the torques listed Tack welds should be contoured to allow for easy inclusion into
on page 49 of this document. the final weld.
7. Welding Technique
4.7 Recommendations for Field a. Prior to welding, the valve should be lightly closed. Where
possible, attach the electrical ground to the adjoining pipe
Welding of Small Carbon on the same side of the valve as the weld being made. Do
not attach the ground to the handwheel or upper structure of
Steel Socket Weld Valves the valve or arcing across the valve seating surfaces could
1. Evaluation of Code Requirements Prior to welding, occur.
construction code requirements should be reviewed (ASME
b. Where possible, welding should be done in the flat or
Section I, VIII, IX, B31.1, B31.3, etc.). Applicable code
horizontal position. Where vertical welding is necessary,
requirements may supersede these recommendations. In the progression should be upward (vertical down welding is
absence of specific code requirements, the guidelines of ASME prone to lack-of-fusion).
Section IX are recommended for qualification.
c. Welding parameters: The following welding parameters may
2. Selection of Process Based on the size of the valve and be used as a guide.
the skill of the welder, either the SMAW (stick) or GTAW (Tig)
process is recommended. SMAW is generally preferred, Electrode Current Voltage Shielding Gas
although, GTAW offers more control (at the expense of speed) / " E6010
3 32 55-75 A — N/A
and may be preferred for 3/4" and smaller valves. / " E7018
3 32 70-90 A * N/A
/ " E7018
18 90-110 A * N/A
3. Selection of Weld Filler Metal For SMAW, use 3/32" electrode
on the first pass with 1/8" for subsequent passes. 1/8" and 5/32" / " ER7OS-2
3 32 75-100 A 13-14 V 100% Argon at
15-20 CFH
electrodes may be used effectively on larger valves. E7018
*Use as close and tight an arc as possible.
electrodes are recommended, although E6010 may be preferred,
particularly on the first pass, if joint cleanliness is less than d. A minimum of two layers should be used for all socket
desirable. welds. This will decrease the chance of leaking even if one
pass contains a weld defect.
Type ER7OS-2 is preferred for GTAW. ER7OS-3 and ER7OS-6
may also be used. 3/32" size is recommended, although 1/16" and
1/8" may also be used successfully.
4. Selecting the Welder Most construction codes require a

welder to qualify prior to making a production weld. Welder
performance qualification provides some assurance that the
production weld will be of good quality since the welder has

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
4.8 Recommendations for Field be removed. Sanding, grinding, or wire brushing is usually

adequate. Solvents may be necessary, if oil is to be removed.
Welding of Small Alloy Steel 6. Fit-up (Socket Weld Valves) In order to gauge fillet weld size
Socket Weld Valves after welding, place a circumferential mark 1" from the engaging
pipe end prior to welding. Bottom out the pipe engagement into
1. Evaluation of Code Requirements Prior to welding, construc-
the socket and pull it back approximately 1/16" to allow for weld
tion code requirements should be reviewed (ASME Section I,
shrinkage. Note the dimension from the mark to the valve pipe
VIII, IX, B31.1, B31.3, etc.). Applicable code requirements may
end.
supersede these recommendations. In the absence of specific
code requirements, the guidelines of ASME Section IX are Tack welds should be contoured to allow for easy inclusion into
recommended for qualification. the final weld
2. Selection of Process Based on the size of the valve and the 7. Welding Technique
skill of the welder, either the SMAW (stick) or GTAW (Tig) pro-
cess is recommended. SMAW is generally preferred, although, a. Prior to welding, the valve should be lightly closed. Where
GTAW offers more control (at the expense of speed) and may be possible, attach the electrical ground to the adjoining pipe
preferred for 3/4" and smaller valves. on the same side of the valve as the weld being made. Do
not attach the ground to the handwheel or upper structure of
3. Selection of Weld Filler Metal For SMAW, use 3/32" electrode the valve or arcing across the valve seating surfaces could
on the first pass with 1/8" for subsequent passes. 1/8" and 5/32" occur.
electrodes may be used effectively on larger valves. 3/32" is
recommended for GTAW. 1/16" and 1/8" may also be used suc- b. Where possible, welding should be done in the flat or
cessfully. Based on the alloy type, the following filler metals are horizontal position. Where vertical welding is necessary,
recommended: progression should be upward (vertical down welding is
prone to lack-of-fusion).
Valve Material SMAW Filler Material GTAW Filler Material
c. Preheat: A minimum preheat of 350°F (175°C) is recom-
A182 F5 E502-15 or 16 ER502
electrodes mended for alloy steels.
A182 F11 E8018-B2 ER80S-B2
d. Welding parameters: The following welding parameters may
A182 F22 E9018-B3 ER9OS-B3 be used as a guide:
Care should be taken to use only SMAW electrodes that have
Electrode Current Voltage Shielding Gas
been kept essentially free of exposure to moisture. Exposure of
SMAW
coated electrodes to moisture can cause high levels of hydrogen
in the weld which can result in delayed cracking, especially with /
3 32" 70-90 A * N/A
hardenable alloys. Electrodes should be kept in heated electrode /
1 8" 90-110 A * N/A
ovens operating at 250–300°F (120–150°C) when not being GTAW
used. Limit atmospheric exposure to eight hours maximum 100% Argon at
without reheating. Electrodes may be used immediately /
3 32" 75-100 A 13-14 V
15-20 CFH
following opening of the hermetically sealed containers in which *Use as close and tight an arc as possible.
they are normally supplied.
e. A minimum of two layers should be used for all socket
4. Selecting the Welder Most construction codes require a welds. This will decrease the chance of leaking even if one
welder to qualify prior to making a production weld. Welder pass contains a weld defect.
performance qualification provides some assurance that the
production weld will be of good quality since the welder has f. Postweld Heat Treatment: Due to controls on thickness and
proven, through testing, that he can make a good weld. Care chemical composition, postweld heat treatment of Vogt F11
should be taken in comparing the welder’s qualification with the and F22 alloy steel valves is not normally required. Postweld
code requirements to assure that the welder has qualified with heat treatment can reduce weld hardness and weld stresses.
an appropriate test for the intended production weld. However, it is also possible to damage valve components
5. Joint Cleanliness The area in-way-of welding should be at high temperatures. Refer to applicable governing codes
cleaned to remove, dirt, oil, and protective coatings. This should to determine if postweld heat treatment is required. Contact
be done prior to fit-up or residue in the joint overlap will not Flowserve for further information if postweld heat treatment
is required.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
4.9 Recommendations for Field b. Where possible, welding should be done in the flat or
horizontal position. Where vertical welding is necessary,
Welding of Small Stainless progression should be upward (vertical down welding is
prone to lack-of-fusion).
Steel Socket Weld Valves c. Welding parameters: The following welding parameters may
1. Evaluation of Code Requirements Prior to welding, construc-
tion code requirements should be reviewed (ASME Section I, be used as a guide:
VIII, IX, ANSI B31.1, B31.3, etc.). Applicable code requirements
Electrode Current Voltage Shielding Gas
may supersede these recommendations. In the absence of
specific code requirements, the guidelines of ASME Section IX /
3 32" E316L-16 70-90 A * N/A
are recommended for qualification. /
1 8" E316L-16 90-110 A * N/A
/
3 32" ER316L 75-100 A 13-14 V 100% Argon at
2. Selection of Process Based on the size of the valve and the 15-20 CFH
skill of the welder, either the SMAW (stick) or GTAW (Tig) pro-
*Use as close and tight an arc as possible.
cess is recommended. SMAW is generally preferred, although,
GTAW offers more control (at the expense of speed) and may be d. A minimum of two layers should be used for all socket
preferred for 3/4" and smaller valves. welds. This will decrease the chance of leaking even if one
pass contains a weld defect.
3. Selection of Weld Filler Metal For SMAW, use 3/32" elec-
trode on the first pass with 1/8" for subsequent passes. 1/8"
and 5/32" electrodes may be used effectively on larger valves.
E316L-16 electrodes are recommended. 4.10 Postweld Heat Treat (PWHT)
/ " type ER316L is recommended for GTAW. 1/16" and 1/8" may
3 32
Recommendations
also be used successfully. The following recommendations are offered as they relate to the
performance of postweld heat treatment on socket-welded or butt-
4. Selecting the Welder Most construction codes require a
welded valves during the installation stage.
welder to qualify prior to making a production weld. Welder
performance qualification provides some assurance that the Please note that ASME B31.1, B31.3, Section VIII and most other
production weld will be of good quality since the welder has
piping codes do not require PWHT of Vogt-designed ASTM A105,
proven, through testing, that he can make a good weld. Care
A182F11 class 2, F22 class 3 and F316/316l valves. Vogt F11 chem-
should be taken in comparing the welder’s qualification with the
code requirements to assure that the welder has qualified with istry is restricted to meet the conditions for waiver of PWHT for this
an appropriate test for the intended production weld. material in most ASME piping codes.
5. Joint Cleanliness The area in-way-of welding should be For assembled valves (seal-welded design*):
cleaned to remove, dirt, oil, and protective coatings. This should 1. Lightly close the assembled valve.
be done prior to fit-up or residue in the joint overlap will not 2. Use only localized heating equipment.
be removed. Sanding, grinding, or wire brushing is usually
adequate. Solvents may be necessary, if oil is to be removed. 3. Do not wrap or insulate total valve during PWHT.
6. Fit-up (Socket Weld Valves) In order to gauge fillet weld size 4. Wrap the localized heating equipment around the welded joint
after welding, place a circumferential mark 1" from the engaging and heat to the desired temperature for the desired length of
pipe end prior to welding. Bottom out the pipe engagement into time.
the socket and pull it back approximately 1/16" to allow for weld
5. Furnace heating of the total valve assembly, as part of a piping
shrinkage. Note the dimension from the mark to the valve pipe
subassembly, is completely unacceptable. As supplied valve trim
end. part material conditions can be impacted by this requirement
Tack welds should be contoured to allow for easy inclusion into and the packing and gasket may be damaged or destroyed.
the final weld. *Vogt seal-welded design valves cannot be disassembled without removal of
the seal weld. A seal-weld valve design should not be used if the valve must
7. Welding Technique be part of an assembly undergoing PWHT in a furnace. For this application,
a bolted bonnet design valve should be used.
a. Prior to welding, the valve should be lightly closed. Where pos-
For bolted bonnet valves (disassembly permitted):
sible, attach the electrical ground to the adjoining pipe on the
1. Localized heating equipment is preferred for the PWHT of these
same side of the valve as the weld being made. Do not attach
valves as well and the PWHT can be done with the valve fully
the ground to the handwheel or upper structure of the valve or
assembled per the instructions above.
arcing across the valve seating surfaces could occur.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
2. When the total valve must be furnace heated as part of a piping D. The furnace for PWHT should be a controlled atmospheric
subassembly to PWHT temperature, the following procedure is type to ensure that heat treat scale does not develop that
recommended: can adversely impact the gasket faces and/or threaded
features of the valve.
A. Disassemble valve. Remove gate/disc, piston, gasket and
bonnet assembly. The seat rings in gate valves cannot be 3. Additionally, the above disassembly procedure may also be
removed and must be left in place. used with localized heating equipment, at the option of the heat
treat provider.
B. For a gate valve, during disassembly the gate and body
shall be marked to ensure that the same gate goes back The above represents our best recommendation but does not
into the same valve body in the same orientation as it was constitute a guarantee that the valve will not suffer some dam-
when it was removed. The gate shall not be rotated when age as a result of PWHT.
reassembled.
The following table offers recommendations relating to valves
C. Replace the bonnet gasket during assembly following PWHT. installed in horizontal and vertical pipes.
Recommended Valve Orientation

Stem Orientation Stem Orientation
Valve Type Horizontal Line (1) Vertical Line (2)
Gate Any (except vertical down) Any Preferred stem horizontal
Preferred vertical stem upright
Gate valve (3) Any (except vertical down) Any Preferred stem horizontal
Motor/air-operated Preferred vertical stem upright
Globe-T pattern Any (except vertical down) Any Preferred stem horizontal
Preferred vertical stem upright
Globe-T pattern (3) Any (except vertical down) Any Preferred stem horizontal
Motor/air-operated Preferred vertical stem upright
Globe-Y pattern Any Any
Preferred stem at ±50° to pipe run in upright position. Preferred stem at ±50° to normal of pipe run
Globe-Y pattern (3) Any Any
Motor/air-operated Preferred stem at ±50° to pipe run in upright position. Preferred stem at ±50° to normal of pipe run
Angle Any (except vertical down) Any
Preferred stem vertical upright Preferred stem vertical upright
Angle (3) Any (except vertical down) Any
Motor/air-operated Preferred vertical stem upright Preferred stem vertical upright
Ball or Piston lift check valve-T pattern Preferred vertical Not recommended
(no spring) (includes stop check valve) Upright
Rotation off top dead center ±40°
Ball or Preferred vertical upright Any
Piston lift check valve-T pattern Rotation off top dead center ±90°
(spring-controlled)
Piston lift check valve-Y pattern Preferred vertical upright Any
(spring-controlled) Rotation off top dead center ±90°
Swing check valve Preferred vertical upright Any, but upward vertical flow required
Rotation off top dead center ±30°
Stop check valves Preferred vertical Not recommended
Upright
Rotation from top dead center ±40°
General: Notes:
• Gate, globe, angle, and spring-controlled check valve designs oriented with (1)
±5° variation off horizontal for the pipe would not change the recom-
A
stem or body run vertical down orient the valve body cavities in such a mendation except for swing check valves. This valve design will not close
matter that debris can be collected and not get flushed out. This may cause by gravity if the piping is off horizontal, which allows the swing check
unreliable valve operation. A vertical stem down or body run down orienta- mechanism to swing away from the seat.
tion is not recommended for fluid service that may include debris. (2)
±5° off variation vertical for vertical piping does not change the recom-
A
• Recommended orientation of motor/air-operated valves may be changed by mendations in the table.
the recommended orientation of the actuator. (3)
F or small-bore socket welding and threaded valves equipped with a motor
or air operator mounted in a horizontal plane, it is recommended that
external supports be added to the piping arrangement to remove the load
from the connecting socket welds or threads of the valve.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
4.11 Testing and Adjustment

It is reasonable to assume that a valve that has been properly
inspected and installed will be in good condition and ready to
operate. However, the actual operability of a valve can only be
proved by testing.
A first observation can be made by actuating the valve through an

open-close-open or close-open-close cycle. If no obvious problems
are observed, an actual test at pressure may then be applied while
tightness and operability are checked.
It is common practice, after the installation of a piping system,

to clean the system by blowing through the system with a gas or
steam or flushing with a liquid to remove debris and/or internal
protective films and coatings. It should be recognized that valve
cavities may form a natural trap in a piping system and material not
dissolved or carried out by the flushing fluid may settle in such cavi-
ties and adversely affect valve operation.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
5
5.1 Introduction
Operation and Maintenance
open and closed, have important functional significance. This is

particularly true in the closed position where the internal closure
An industrial valve, reasonably matched to a particular service ap-
element (disc, plug, gate, etc.) must be correctly positioned in rela-
plication and properly installed in a piping system, can be expected
tion to the seat to assure a positive seal.
to have a long service life with a minimum of attention. Unlike totally
passive components such as pipe fittings, vessels, etc., valves are Check the handwheel jamb nut to ensure that it is tight. After instal-
a special kind of “machinery” having moving and wearing parts. lation, periodically check the nut to ensure tightness.
The satisfactory performance of these working parts depends on
Valves in which the closure element moves to and from the seat,
the long-term preservation of various highly finished surfaces.
such as in globe, angle, and wedge gate valves, depend to some
Therefore, it is important to give adequate attention to the specific
degree on the mechanical force of the stem holding the closure ele-
requirements for proper operation and reasonable maintenance of
ment against the seat to make and maintain a tight shutoff. This is
all valves throughout their service life.
most important if the line pressure to be shut off acts on the closure
element in a direction so as to push it off the seat. When globe
valves are installed so that the line pressure then acts in the same
5.2 Operation – Manual Valves direction as the stem force and also in wedge gate type valves, the
Most valves are actuated manually by causing rotational movement line pressure then acts to increase the seating load, making valve
of a handwheel, wrench, handle, etc. Care is required to assure that stem loading less critical. However, substantial stem force will still
such movement is in the correct direction, is not too fast or too slow be required at low line pressures. The stem force may even be more
and is applied through the proper distance. The terminal positions, important at low line pressures than at high line pressures.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
Globe valves (straight, angle or Y-pattern) and stop check valves a CAUTION: Some users consider that backseats are provided
with pressure under the disc, require sufficient stem loading to for the purpose of repacking valves, which are under
balance the line pressure and provide adequate net seat load. The pressure. When the packing is removed in this situation,
higher the line pressure, the higher the required stem loading to any leakage past the backseat escapes directly to the
achieve a leak-tight seal. Follow the manufacturer’s recommenda- atmosphere and constitutes a potential safety hazard to
tions on torque or handwheel rim force for seating of manually personnel. The practice of repacking under pressure is
operated valves as well as impacting of impactor-type handles or not recommended. Further, if a valve is operated in the
handwheels. backseated position for any reason, exercise caution when
moving the stem away from the backseat as the packing
a CAUTION: The use of valve wrenches on handwheels may may have deteriorated while isolated from the line fluid and
lead to valve damage or injury to operators.
then leak when exposed to pressure.
Most valves in which the internal closure elements slide across the
Purchase specifications requiring restrictive maximum forces to
seat as in ball, plug, non-wedging gates, butterfly etc., do not rely on
be applied on levers or handwheel rims may also lead to damag-
stem actuating force to provide tight shutoff. However, the correct
ing forces being applied to valves or actuators in actual practice
position of the closure element in these types of valves is very im-
as larger forces are sometimes applied in the field. Users should
portant. In some cases, the effort required to move the closure ele-
consider this fact in training of operating personnel.
ment may increase substantially during final approach to the closed
position, giving a false impression of having reached the required
position. Failure to reach and stop at the full-closed position can
result in leakage and consequent damage to the seal elements. 5.3 Operation –
Thermal expansion and contraction can cause solid wedge gate Power Actuated Valves
valves to “lock up” if closed while hot. As the relatively cooler stem Functionally, closure performance characteristics and backseat-
heats up to body temperature, and/or the body cools down toward ing considerations are associated with all valve types regardless
the stem temperature, the stem expansion and/or body contraction of the means of operation. Satisfactory valve performance with
will cause stem thrust to increase. If the thrust increases sufficiently, power actuation requires appropriate programming of the various
the wedge may be “locked” between the tapered seats. requirements and constraints into the actuator controls. Therefore,
the actuator should be adjusted to deliver an adequate opening,
Vogt valve stems are provided with a backseat arrangement, that
running and closing force to suit the anticipated service conditions.
is, a shoulder on the stem or on another part of the stem-disc as-
For the position-sensitive valve types, the close control should be
sembly, that engages a corresponding seat shoulder on the inner
position controlled by external stops or limit switches. Be sure to
side of the bonnet.
contact the actuator manufacturer’s operation manual for more
It has become generally recognized that the use of the stem back- detailed information.
seat for stem sealing may mask an unsatisfactory condition of the
Data required for selection and adjustment of power actuators
stem packing. For this reason, the use of the backseat for normal
should be delineated clearly in purchase specifications for actuated
operational stem sealing is not recommended. It is recommended
valves. This data shall include but not necessarily be limited to:
that the valve be opened against the backseat as a means of deter-
mining that the full-open position has been reached, and the stem a) Upstream pressure and differential pressure conditions at which
should then be backed off slightly from the backseat. both opening and closing shall be required. Specify direction
if applicable. Additionally, specify if valve operation is required
If circumstances necessitate use of the backseat for stem sealing to
under high-flow “blow down” conditions.
permit system operation until a shutdown will allow replacement of
the stem packing, it should be recognized that backseats are usually b) Speed of operation required or the maximum time for opening
much smaller than “mainseats” and care should be exercised to and/or closing. Also, specify a minimum time if required due to
avoid applying excessive stem force in back seating. Impactors, fluid dynamics.
gears, or similar features provided to assist in main seating valves
c) Electrical power supply available (AC or DC voltage, phase,
should not be used for backseating.
frequency) for electrical power actuators or controls. Operating
conditions for reduced voltages should also be considered.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
d) Pneumatic pressure available for pneumatic actuators (cylinders backpressure in the line, the fluid column will reverse its velocity
or diaphragms). Also, specify fail-open, fail-closed, fail-as-is, or and close the void created by the fluid column rupture and cause
any special requirements. another pressure surge when it reaches the valve.
e) Requirements for position indication signals. It should be recognized that pressure surge intensity is roughly
proportional to the length and velocity of the fluid column upstream
Actuator selection and adjustments should normally be made by
of the closing valve and inversely proportional to the time taken to
Flowserve based on published literature and/or technical advice
close the valve. Fluid column rupture and return surge intensity is
of actuator manufacturer. Flowserve should be consulted when a
proportional to the same condition on the other side of the valve in
manually operated valve must be retrofitted with a power actuator.
addition to the back pressure in that section of piping. Therefore,
a slow closing is helpful in limiting the magnitude of the pressure
a CAUTION: Some valve actuators, when sized to provide
surge phenomena.
specified loading, may have much higher output at maxi-
mum switch or control settings and therefore be capable of In large, long distance liquid pipelines it is critically important to
damaging valves if misadjusted. Valve and actuator manu- evaluate pressure surge possibilities and to establish limits on the
facturer instructions should be followed closely to prevent speed of closure of the flow shutoff valves. In operating such valves
overloading valve stems, backseats and other structural or setting the speed of operation of power-actuated valves, design
parts. Successful operation of power-operated valves re- limits on speed of closure should be conscientiously observed.
quires a diligent coordination of the skills and efforts of the
valve specifier, Flowserve and the actuator manufacturer. Rapid closure of a valve in any flowing liquid pipeline can cause a
Most applications are problem-free, but miscommunication substantial pressure surge that may manifest itself in a sharp “bang”
can lead to unreliable operation at one extreme and possible or possibly a series of “bangs.” This is frequently referred to as
valve or actuator damage at the other extreme. water hammer. This phenomenon can occur in any flowing liquid
line and is not limited to waterlines. Rapid closing of a shutoff valve
in a flowing liquid line should be avoided especially during the last
part of the stem travel.
5.4 Fluid Dynamics
of Shutoff Valve Operation
A flowing fluid in a piping system has mass and velocity. Anything 5.5 Check Valves
that causes a moving mass to change its velocity will experience a Check valves are one-way valves that function to automatically stop
reacting inertia force in proportion to the magnitude of the mass and a flow reversal in a flowing line. In most applications, the fastest
the rate of the imposed velocity change. possible closure is desirable. The speed of closure is understood in
terms of the shortest possible time to achieve closure following the
However, in the flow of gases the reacting inertia forces are inher- instant of flow reversal. It follows then, that the shorter that time
ently moderated by the compressibility of the fluid that permits the interval can be made, the lower the velocity of the reverse flowing
instantaneous velocity change to be effectively limited to the mass liquid will be.
of fluid in the immediate vicinity. This, in addition to the self-cush-
ioning capacity of the fluid column in the upstream pipe, effectively The pressure surge resulting from a check valve closure is likely
precludes any significant problem of pressure surge in rapidly to be more severe than that in the case of the shutoff valve as the
closed valves in gaseous fluid piping. shutoff valve will usually provide a throttling action, while the check
valve closure may be virtually instantaneous with little preliminary
In contrast, the inertia of the fluid column in a liquid pipeline is not throttling.
so easily overcome. Its relative incompressibility provides no such
cushion or proximity-limiting mechanism. The entire upstream fluid A check valve closure can also cause downstream fluid column
mass is required to be decelerated at once by the closing valve, rupture just as in the case of shutoff valves. Furthermore, on
and the resulting pressure surge may be of sufficient magnitude to fluid column reassembly, the pressure surge may be of sufficient
cause structural damage. magnitude to reopen the check valve, starting another sequence of
closure, surge, etc. Under certain conditions a protracted succes-
An additional potential problem can occur downstream from the sion of closure “hammers” may result.
closing valve. This may be described as fluid column rupture and
involves the inertia of the fluid column carrying it away from the The kinetic energy in flowing fluids present special problems regard-
closed valve with the proximate space being occupied by a bubble of ing check valve performance. Quick closing is normally desirable,
the fluid vapor or, simply, a substantial vacuum. If there is sufficient

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
but special features may be required for certain situations. Careful Mechanical or high-intensity fluid noise in the vicinity of a valve may
systems analysis may be required in complex applications. be a warning of potentially serious trouble. Expert assistance should
be obtained from system engineers or the valve manufacturer to
While a rapid closure of a check valve is normally the best method of
determine the cause and evaluate possible need for action.
minimizing pressure surges due to flow reversal, some applications
produce flow reversals that are too rapid to prevent excessive reverse Noise emitted from a closed valve is a special case that may indicate
velocity before the closure of a standard check valve could occur. seat leakage requiring repair. A whistling sound may indicate severe
erosion of seating surfaces while “gurgling” or “popping” sounds
Such applications may require consideration of special valve
may signify less severe leakage.
features such as:
Consult Flowserve Vogt Valves when noise levels are desired for a
a) A spring or method of other loading to provide more rapid
Vogt valve. Flowserve will need pressure, temperature, flow rate,
closing.
fluid details and pressure drop to determine the noise level.
b) A dashpot or snubber to provide a slower, more controlled
closure in order to reduce reverse flow velocity by a throttling
action, as in a shutoff valve. 5.7 Maintenance
Valves are properly considered to be a hybrid structure, a combina-
tion of a pressure vessel and operating machinery. Maintenance pro-
5.6 Noise cedures therefore, must reflect the requirements of the occasional
There are many different valve operating conditions that can result opening or closing of the “machinery” and the predominant operat-
in noise. Such noise may be “normal” considering the nature of ing condition of the valve where pressure is continuously applied
the fluid and the pressure, temperature and velocity of flow. There and nothing is moving. The important performance parameters are
may be a “wind” noise in a flowing gas line. There may be clear pressure boundary integrity, actuating effort required and internal
or hoarse whistling sounds resulting from the shape of the flow leak tightness. Maintenance should logically address the importance
passage, including the flow path through a valve. Cavitating condi- of preserving these performance parameters.
tions in a liquid line can cause a “white noise” that ranges from a
Valves that remain in one position for long periods of time may be
whisper to a sound like rocks and gravel, to a deafening roar. There
hard to operate and/or not function as well as when originally in-
may also be mechanical noises as a result of movement of internal
stalled. This reduction of operability can result from either a loss of
“things” acted on by the flowing fluid. Some of these noises may be
effective lubricants, aging of packing, surface corrosion of moving
relatively harmless insofar as system integrity and performance are
parts, or an accumulation of deleterious solids. In some applications
concerned. Mechanical damage in lines with compressible fluid is
it may be desirable to schedule periodic partial or full cycle exercis-
generally limited to points of sonic or supersonic velocity, or where
ing of such valves.
a vortex resonance with an internal component causes movement
and wear or breakage. Check valves require special consideration because they normally
have no external stems, actuators, or packings that might indicate
Vortex resonance with an internal component may also cause
a pending operational problem. Complete internal failure may occur
problems in liquid service. In addition, noise may be evidence of
due to wear with no obvious advance warning. Preventive main-
cavitation, which has the potential for causing mechanical damage,
tenance is recommended particularly where sudden check valve
including massive erosion of the metal walls of a valve or pipe walls
failure may require expensive plant or system shutdown.
and/or other internal components.
Noise or vibration emitted at or near a closed check valve may be an
A full technical discussion of all sound-generating mechanisms is
indicator of leakage. Distinctive noises may also be produced from
beyond the scope of this document. Nevertheless, it is recommend-
internal motion of the parts of check valves that are not fully open
ed that an evaluation be made of any condition of remarkable noise
during forward flowing conditions. “Thumping” or “tapping” may
in a piping system at least to the point of understanding its cause.
indicate that the disc is impacting either on the seat or the full-open
If a valve is involved, a determination should be made as to whether
stop, or simply “rattling” in its guides. These types of conditions
the valve is the source or just happens to be the location of the
can lead to rapid wear and failure of the valve. Special non-intrusive
noise. Usually, if the valve is the source, the noise can be “tuned” by
diagnostics systems can be used to augment the evaluation of the
slightly “throttling” the valve.
noise. Periodic disassembly and internal inspection of selected

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
valves may be advisable, particularly where they are located close to Severe throttling service may cause the valve to be subjected to
upstream flow disturbances. damage of the seating surfaces and other parts. Severe cavita-
tion can cause gross damage of the internal parts, including the
Stem seals may be a source of problems, particularly in valves that
valve body and downstream piping. Good preventive maintenance
are frequently cycled or must operate at high pressures or tempera-
procedures including periodic inspections may prevent serious
tures. The stem seal must prevent or minimize leakage of line fluid
failures that require expensive shutdowns. Methods of evaluation
between a movable stem and a stationary bonnet. While special
and solutions for maintenance problems are beyond the scope of
mechanical arrangements, elastomers, or proprietary seals are used
this document. Flowserve should be consulted concerning design
in some cases, the normal arrangement includes a cylindrical cham-
features and operating procedures for valves.
ber in the bonnet surrounding the stem, with compression packing
materials retained in the chamber by a gland and associated bolting. External valve mechanisms, actuators and accessories are gener-
ally readily accessible for inspection and maintenance. Reasonable
Conventional compression packing requires that the gland bolting
protection should be provided to prevent mechanical damage and
provide sufficient load to eliminate any communication porosity in
potentially degrading environmental exposure to such things as
the packing material and to compress it into intimate contact with
airborne grit, chemicals or moisture. Working surfaces such as
the stem and bonnet. Clearances between the associated parts must
stem threads, bearings, and gears should be lubricated on a reason-
be close enough to contain the packing material and minimize extru-
able schedule using the lubricants recommended or approved by the
sion. Maintenance practices that increase clearances (e.g., machin-
valve or actuator manufacturers.
ing of glands and/or bonnets to remove corrosion), may result in
packing extrusion and leakage or “blowout”. Maintenance of valves must involve a good preventive maintenance
program, particularly for check valves and valves in servere throt-
Pressure boundary integrity requires basically sound pressure-
tling service. Stem sealing problems may be alleviated by use of the
containing parts, a pressure-tight static seal at assembly joints and
newest technology in valve design, packing materials and installa-
in most cases, an effective working seal between a moving stem
tion procedures.
and the valve body. Maintenance of pressure boundary parts and
the static seal of assembly joints are not usually considered to be
a problem. However, continuous monitoring is recommended to
confirm that problems do not occur. The need for paint protection 5.8 Valve Maintenance
against corrosion of exposed piping should be obvious from normal
observations of the system. Notice
Wear and loss of packing material are normal expectations in This manual is intended as a maintenance guide for Flowserve Vogt
frequently cycled valves. However, current packing materials and Valves. Before working on any Vogt valves or related products,
systems will minimize this deterioration particularly in new and the reader should review and fully comply with this manual and its
well-maintained valves. Packing gland adjustment may be necessary warnings and with the reader’s company safety procedures.
from time to time but routine “repacking” should not be required in If anything in this manual is unclear, contact the Flowserve Cus-
most valves that are otherwise well maintained. Packing replace- tomer Service Department for assistance.
ment can usually be deferred until a time when other valve main-
tenance is required as long as the packing gland shows adequate Flowserve and its employees are in no way responsible for dam-
room for further adjustment. The repacking of a backseated valve age to property or for personal injury or death which may result
under pressure is not recommended. through the use or misuse of any Vogt product, publication, audio
or visual aid.
Valve manufacturers and packing manufacturers should be con-
sulted regarding the best design features and compression packing
materials available to solve chronic packing problems. Ongoing Warning
developments in valve design and packing technology may offer Vogt valves described in this manual may have been manufactured
improvements that can be implemented by retrofitting a valve prior to September 1, 1986 and may have been equipped with
with improved design, materials and installation procedures. For gaskets that contained asbestos. When servicing, disassembling,
example, spacers may be used in the deep packing chambers com- or disposing of these products, avoid breathing the asbestos fibers
mon in old valves designed for use with old-style asbestos packings or dust. Dispose of the material in accordance with local, state, and
so that new packings/materials may be effectively installed. federal law.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
Customer Service inspection of the noted critical areas. The most common location of
a noticeable leak is at the stem seal. Leakage at the stem can usually
If at any time you require assistance from Flowserve in the maintain-
be stopped by adjusting the packing. If leakage cannot be stopped
ing of your Vogt valves, feel free to call your Customer Service
by packing adjustment, repacking is indicated. However, backseating
Representative, at the appropriate number listed on the back cover
the valve and attempting to repack under pressure is hazardous and
of this manual. Or write us at:
is not recommended. Rather than attempting to repack under pres-
Flowserve Sulphur Springs Operations sure, it is preferable to use the backseat to control the stem leakage
1511 Jefferson Street until a shutdown provides safe repacking conditions.
Sulphur Springs, Texas 75482 USA
Or Fax us at: (903) 439-3386

5.10 Major Field Repair
Maintenance involving rework or replacement of parts is considered
Field Service major repair. When circumstances dictate field repair of Vogt valves,
Our Sales Representatives are the best in the business. They can the following information is offered as an aid. It must be pointed out,
provide you with technical information about your Vogt valves, and however, that valves repaired in the field are no longer under “Prod-
are available to visit your facility to conduct general maintenance uct Warranty,” and in no event is Flowserve liable for any incidental
seminars. or consequential damages resulting from any cause whatsoever.
There are no warranties of any kind whatsoever, express or implied,
other than those stated in Flowserve’s limited warranty provision.
When You Call or Write
Be sure you provide the correct information and/or part numbers for
your Vogt valves. Over the years there have been design changes 5.11 Care and Maintenance
due to our continuing effort make great valves even better. It is very
important that we are provided the information necessary to cor- of Vogt Forged Steel Valves
rectly identify your valve.
The following information, located on the valve nameplate, is

Preliminary Considerations for Valve Repair:
required to ensure the correct information and/or parts are provided 1. Use experienced, trained personnel.
for your valve:
2. Observe all standard safety precautions
1. The valve size and series number (including any prefixes or
3. If possible, remove valve from line so that work can be done in a
suffixes).
clean, well-lighted area.
2. The valve drawing number listed on the valve nameplate.
4. Use genuine Vogt replacement parts.
Please note: In early 2002, our parent company changed, so the
5. Use proper tools.
nameplates on Vogt valves will show one of three company names:
6. Pressure test valve before reinstalling. This is particularly es-
• Henry Vogt Machine Co, Louisville, KY, or
sential on valves intended for critical service.
• Edward Vogt Valve, Inc, Jeffersonville, Indiana.
7. Remember that improper repairs can be hazardous.
• Flowserve, Inc, Sulphur Springs, TX.
Replacement Parts – How To Order
5.9 Routine Inspection and Genuine replacement parts are available for Vogt current standard
valves and can usually be shipped from stock. All parts are made
Maintenance with the same careful inspection and laboratory control given original
valves and parts. Orders for replacement parts should clearly identify
Once the right valve is properly installed, field maintenance is of a
the items required and should specify the correct name of the part,
generally routine nature and can be readily performed by the user.
valve size and series number, drawing and revision number, material,
The critical areas of a valve include the stem threads and those loca-
etc. The drawing and revision number which appears on the identifi-
tions where leakage will most likely occur—the stem packing, the
cation disc attached to the handwheel is of particular value.
bonnet joint, the seat and the end connections. It is desirable that
a maintenance program be established which will include periodic

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
In the absence of an identification disc, series numbers may be Bonnet Joints

found on the side of the valve body or drawing numbers may be
On valves of the union bonnet type, repairs can be made without
found on the bonnet flange. The purchase date and/or purchase
removing the valve from the line, provided there is enough wrench
order number will further identify the parts and materials originally
room for loosening and tightening the bonnet nut. Before loosening
ordered, especially valves with custom-designed features.
the bonnet nut, be sure valve is relieved of all pressure. A few ham-
The embossed number on each handwheel, having a prefix letter mer taps to the side of the bonnet nut or around the body neck of
“V”, is the pattern number of the handwheel and has no relation screw bonnet type valves will loosen nut or bonnet. Gasketed joints
to the ordering of other valve parts. Prices for valve parts will be require smooth, clean surfaces on both the body and the bonnet
furnished on application. gasket faces, and a new gasket is recommended for reassembly. On
bolted bonnet valves in high-temperature service, and particularly
where severe thermal cycling is involved, it is recommended that
Tools For Installing Replacement Parts bolt torque be checked periodically. This recommendation applies to
Wrenches are available (price on application) for the removal and gland bolting as well.
replacement of renewable seats for globe, angle, and check valves.
The wrenches are machined to an accurate finish to fit the spline
broach on the inside diameter of the seat and are properly heat Packing – General
treated for strength and toughness. Vogt valves have well-proportioned stuffing boxes filled with the
best grade of packing available. Before repacking, be sure to have
the right grade, type, and size of packing.
Disassembly
Small valves of the union bonnet type or of the screw bonnet types c WARNING: Repacking under pressure is hazardous and
are readily disassembled by unscrewing the union nut or the bonnet. is not recommended. The backseat should be used as a
In bolted bonnet valves, the nut should be removed from the bonnet temporary measure to control the stem leakage until a
stud bolts or hexagon head cap screws removed from the body. shutdown provides safe repacking conditions.
Tight bolt threads may be loosened by applying penetrating oil to
the threads or by selectively heating the bolt at the point of thread Partial disassembly of the valve is required if endless packing rings
engagement. On bonnet joints of the through-bolt type, the bolts are to be placed in the valve. Split rings can be added without
may be cut between the body and bonnet flanges for removal. disassembly but is not the preferred method. Partial disassembly
greatly facilitates the removal of old packing and the repacking with
new packing.
Stems
Vogt makes maximum use of flexible graphite in the packing of its
Tight stems in valves of the O.S. and Y. type are caused by either
high temperature valves. This packing does not dry out and retains
dry, worn packing, or nonlubrication of yoke nut threads. Applying a
its compressibility. Valves packed with flexible graphite do not
few drops of oil to the stem threads and packing, and opening and
require full repacking except for severe blowing leaks, where erosion
closing the valve a few times, may loosen the stem. At the same
damage may have occurred to all rings of the flexible graphite pack-
time, make sure the packing gland bolting is pulled down evenly so
ing. In this event all rings of packing shall be replaced. Otherwise,
the gland will not bind against the stem; however, care should be
the maintenance of the valve packing can be maintained merely by
taken not to overcompress the packing.
the addition of one or two rings of flexible graphite without major
A tight stem in an inside screw valve may also result from worn or valve disassembly.
overcompressed packing, or the stem bonnet threads may “freeze”
Wipe all parts of the stuffing box, inside and out, before installing
from excessive service temperatures or from corrosive fluids in the
new packing. Vogt uses endless* and split ring type packing. If split
valve. If the stem turns freely after all packing is removed, and if the
ring type is used for replacement, take care to stagger the ring slits
surface of the stem in contact with the packing is in good condition,
so that they are not in line. After putting in a few rings, tamp them
new packing is the remedy. If stem is still tight, turn valve to upright
well into place, using the packing gland as a tamping tool. Then add
position, fill the stuffing box with penetrating oil, and let soak. If
enough packing to fill the stuffing box. Pressure on the packing is
stem remains tight, a new bonnet and stem are required, or, if prac-
applied by the packing nut or gland flange bolting, depending on
tical, an O.S. and Y. type valve could be substituted.
valve design, which bears on a gland in the stuffing box. Gland bolt-
ing should be tightened evenly to obtain the proper packing com-
pression for leak-free service. Upon reassembling the valve, a few

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
turns of the handwheel and a few drops of oil applied on the stem 12. Tighten packing gland bolting evenly.
just above the packing will help work in the packing to the stem.
13. Open and close valve to ensure free operation.
* Vogt has used a one-piece endless cylinder of packing in its
factory-made valves for several years, and if this packing is to be replaced 14. Place valve back in service.
it will be necessary to remove the cylinder packing from the valve before
repacking. If individual rings have been used, the individual rings can be
removed as necessary. If complete valve disassembly is used during pack- Alternate Method
ing of a valve, the packing cylinder can be used for replacement. (No Major Disassembly Required)
See Section 1 for Packing Cartridge PN.
1. Remove packing gland bolting and free up packing gland.
5.12 Detailed Packing 2. Remove top ring of packing. This will be a braided graphite pack-
ing. Prepare chamber to accept new ring or rings of packing.
Instructions 3. Split a number of packing rings of flexible graphite as required
and place individual ring in packing chamber using the gland to
O.S. and Y. Bolted Bonnet Gate Valves ram the packing into the chamber. Stagger packing ring’s sepa-
(Typical Series 12111) rations by 90° if more than one ring is required. Replace top
(Partial Disassembly Required) ring of braided graphite packing as required. If total replacement
of packing is necessary, a bottom ring of braided packing shall
1. Loosen packing gland bolting and free up gland.
be used.
2. Remove bonnet bolts and bonnet subassembly.
4. Tighten packing gland bolting evenly.
a CAUTION: Mark the gate and note orientation. The 5. Open and close valve to ensure free operation.
same gate and orientation shall be maintained upon
replacement. 6. Place valve back in service.
3. Spin handwheel until stem is removed from yoke nut thread.

Packing
4. Pull stem through packing. Rotating the stem during removal
O.S. and Y. Bolted Bonnet Globe Valve
from the packing will aid in this process.
(Typical Series 12141)
5. Remove packing gland and gland bolting. (Partial Disassembly Required)
6. Remove top ring of packing. This will be a braided graphite 1. Loosen packing gland bolting and free up gland.
packing. Remove additional packing as required.
2. Remove bonnet bolts.
7. Add new rings of flexible graphite packing and one new top and
3. Remove handwheel nut and nameplate.
bottom ring of braided packing as required.
4. Spin handwheel until stem moves through yoke nut loosening
8. Replace packing gland and snug up gland bolting evenly.
and pushing off handwheel.
9. Insert new bonnet gasket. Insert gate/stem into body.
5. Remove yoke/bonnet subassembly, rotate stem and totally
10. Place yoke bonnet subassembly back on stem and rotate hand- remove stem from yoke thread.
wheel to seat bonnet.
6. Pull stem through packing. Rotating the stem during removal
11. Replace bonnet bolts and torque bonnet bolts until bonnet joint from the packing will aid in this process.
becomes metal-to-metal. A .007" feeler gage may be used to
7. Remove packing gland and gland bolting.
gage joint. A bonnet/body joint that will accept a .007" feeler
gage is not properly torqued and is not metal-to-metal. Ad- 8. Remove top ring of packing. This will be a braided graphite
ditional torque should be applied. packing. Remove additional packing as required.
a CAUTION: During the torquing of the bonnet joint, the 9. Add new rings of flexible graphite packing and one new top and
valve should be slightly open. This will prevent the bottom ring of braided graphite packing as required.
bonnet bolt torque from driving the disc or gate into the 10. Replace packing gland and snug up gland bolting evenly.
valve seat and will ensure the bonnet joint will go metal-
to-metal. 11. Place stem back into yoke/bonnet subassembly.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
12. Rotate stem to engage yoke nut thread. Stem should be rotated 3. Remove yoke/handwheel assembly from yoke/bonnet
until stem broach is visible and the handwheel can be placed on subassembly.
the stem. Replace nameplate and handwheel nut, tighten nut.
a CAUTION: The stem should be maintained in a near
13. Insert new bonnet gasket. open position to ensure that the yoke/bonnet thread
14. Place yoke/bonnet subassembly on valve and replace bonnet and the stem thread difference do not create a condition
bolting. where the stem is locked against the backseat, making
removal of the yoke impossible.
15. Replace bonnet bolts and torque bonnet bolts until bonnet joint
becomes metal-tometal. A .007" feeler gage may be used to 4. Remove top ring of packing. This will be a braided graphite
gage joint. A bonnet/body joint that will accept a .007" feeler packing. Remove additional packing as required.
gage is not properly torqued and is not metal-to-metal. Ad-
5. Add new rings of flexible graphite packing and one new top ring
ditional torque should be applied.
of braided graphite packing as required. If total replacement of
packing is necessary, a bottom ring of braided packing shall be
a CAUTION: During the torquing of the bonnet joint, the
valve should be slightly open. This will prevent the bon- used.
net bolt torque from driving the disc into the valve seat 6. Replace yoke/handwheel assembly to bonnet subassembly.
and will ensure the bonnet joint will go metal-to-metal.
a CAUTION: When replacing yoke/handwheel assem-
16. Tighten packing gland bolting evenly. bly, the valve stem should be maintained in an open
17. Open and close valve to ensure free operation. position to ensure the yoke thread advance does not
drive the gate into the seats potentially making the yoke
18. Place valve back in service. replacement impossible.
Alternate Method 7. Tighten packing gland bolting evenly.

(No Major Disassembly Required) 8. Tack weld yoke/bonnet subassembly at or near same location
1. Remove packing gland bolting and free up packing gland. from which tack weld was removed. Tack weld in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommended procedure.
2. Remove top ring of packing. This will be a braided graphite pack-
ing. Prepare chamber to accept new ring or rings of packing. 9. Open and close valve to ensure free operation.
3. Split a number of packing rings of flexible graphite as required 10. Place valve back in service.
and place individual rings in packing chamber using the gland to
ram the packing into the chamber. Stagger packing ring’s sepa- Alternate Method
rations by 90° if more than one ring is required. Replace top (No Major Disassembly Required)
ring of braided graphite packing as required. If total replacement
of packing is necessary, a bottom ring of braided packing shall
be used. 2. Remove top ring of packing. This will be a braided graphite pack-
ing. Prepare chamber to accept new rings or rings of packing.
4. Tighten packing gland bolting evenly.
3. Split a number of packing rings of flexible graphite as required
and place individual rings in packing chamber using the gland
6. Place valve back in service. to ram the packing into the chamber. Stagger packing ring’s
separations by 90° if more than one ring is required. Replace
O.S. and Y. Welded Bonnet Gate Valves top ring of braided graphite ring as required. If total replacement
(Typical Series 2801) of packing is necessary, a bottom ring of braided packing shall
Preferred Method (Requires Disassembly of be used.
Yoke/Bonnet Subassembly) 4. Tighten packing gland bolting evenly.
1. Loosen packing gland bolting and free up gland.
2. Remove tack weld(s) at yoke/bonnet interface. A hammer and a
6. Place valve back in service.
sharp chisel should be utilized for this operation.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
O.S.and Y. Welded Bonnet Globe Valves 3. Split a number of packing rings of flexible graphite as required
(Typical Series 2821) and place individual rings in packing chamber using the gland to
ram the packing into the chamber.
Preferred Method (Requires Disassembly Of Yoke/
Bonnet Subassembly) Stagger packing ring’s separations by 90° if more than one ring
1. Loosen packing gland bolting and free up gland. is required. Replace top ring of braided graphite packing as
required. If total replacement of packing is necessary, a bottom
2. Remove handwheel nut, nameplate, and handwheel. ring of braided packing shall be used.
3. Remove tack weld(s) at yoke/bonnet subassembly. Remove 4. Tighten packing gland bolting evenly.
yoke.
a CAUTION: The stem should be maintained in a near 6. Place valve back in service.
closed position to ensure that the yoke/bonnet thread
and the stem thread difference do not create a condition
Inside Screw, Welded or Bolted Bonnet,
where the stem is locked against the backseat, making
removal of the yoke impossible.
Gate or Globe Valve
(Typical Series 12161 and 12181)
4. Remove top ring of packing. This will be a braided graphite 1. Remove handwheel nut, nameplate, and handwheel.
packing. Remove additional packing as required.
2. Remove packing nut and packing gland.
5. Add new rings of flexible graphite packing and one new top ring
of braided graphite packing as required. If total replacement of 3. Remove top ring of packing. This will be a braided graphite
packing is necessary, a bottom ring of braided packing shall be packing. Remove additional packing as required.
used. 4. Add new rings of flexible graphite packing and one new top
6. Replace the yoke to the bonnet. ring of braided graphite packing as required. If total replace-
ment of packing is necessary, a bottom ring of braided packing
a CAUTION: When replacing the yoke the valve stem shall be used.
should be maintained in an open position to ensure
5. Replace packing gland and packing nut.
the yoke thread advance does not drive the disc into
the seat, potentially making the yoke replacement near 6. Tighten packing nut.
impossible.
7. Replace handwheel, nameplate, and handwheel nut and tighten
7. Tighten packing gland bolting evenly. nut.
8. Tack weld yoke/bonnet subassembly at or near the same 8. Open and close valve to ensure free operation.
location from which the tack weld was removed. Tack weld in 9. Place valve back into service.
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended practice.
9. Replace handwheel, nameplate, and handwheel nut and tighten

nut. 5.13 Fluoropolymer
10. Open and close valve to ensure free operation. Packing Instructions
11. Place valve back in service. For Vogt standard valves packed with Style C-VH packing,
the detailed procedures above may be used as applicable.
Alternate Method Fluoropolymer packing orientation shall be as outlined in Figure 3.
(No Major Disassembly Required)

2. Remove top ring of packing. This will be a braided graphite pack-

ing. Prepare chamber to accept new rings or rings of packing.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
5.14 Vogt Valves Packed With 5.16 For Combination Pressure/

Fluoropolymer for High- Vacuum Applications
Pressure Applications The C-VH rings should be oriented per Figure 5.
– Standard NOTE: In the event endless fluoropolymer rings are split, they may
be cut at a 45° angle by the use of a razorblade. Install one ring at
See solid assembly arrangement for method utilizing the C-VH a time and stagger the splits in succeeding rings by 90°. Endless
packing rings. All fluoropolymer packing is used, even for the bot- rings are preferred and this requires valves to be disassembled
tom ring. This is a standard fluoropolymer packing method and is during repacking.
designed to seal on internal pressure. See Figure 3.
5.17 Style C-VH Rings

5.15 For Vacuum Applications
The C-VH rings should be partially inverted for vacuum applications for High-Pressure Service
because leakage is from outside environment to inside of valve. This design incorporates a heavy wall and heel section necessary to
Rings should be oriented per Figure 4. withstand pressures up to 500 psi and greater.
C-VH rings are recommended for high-pressure applications such

as hydraulic cylinders and pumps. See Figure 3.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
Figure 3 – Stuffing Box: Standard and High Pressure Applications
I.D.
DEPTH
O.D.
FIGURE 1
Standard and High Pressure Applications

Stuffing Box Space Number Of C-VH Rings
Valve Size O.D. I.D. Depth Cross
(in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) Section (in2) Top Rings Bottom Rings Center Rings
1/2 .62 .38 .62 .125 1 1 4
3/4 .62 .38 .62 .125 1 1 4
1 .88 .50 1.12 .188 1 1 6
11/4 .94 .56 1.12 .188 1 1 6
11/2 .94 .56 1.12 .188 1 1 6
2 1.12 .62 1.50 .250 1 1 6
3 1.25 .75 1.50 .250 1 1 6
4 1.38 .88 1.75 .250 1 1 7
Figure 4 – Stuffing Box: Vacuum Applications Figure 5 – Stuffing Box: Combined Pressure/Vacuum Applications
INVERTED INVERTED
PACKING PACKING
I.D.
I.D.
DEPTH DEPTH
O.D.
O.D.
3 - C-VH RINGS (1 EACH, 3 - C-VH RINGS (1 EACH,

1" AND ABOVE VALVE SIZES) 1" AND ABOVE VALVE SIZES)
2 - C-VH RINGS (1 TOP AND 2 - C-VH RINGS (1 TOP AND
1 BOTTOM, ½" AND ¾" 1 BOTTOM, ½" AND ¾"
VALVE SIZES) VALVE SIZES)
Combined Pressure/Vacuum Applications

Stuffing Box Space Number Of C-VH Rings
Valve Size O.D. I.D. Depth Cross
(in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) Section (in2) Top Rings Bottom Rings Center Rings
1/2 .62 .38 .62 .125 2 2 2
3/4 .62 .38 .62 .125 2 2 2
1 .88 .50 1.12 .188 2 2 4
11/4 .94 .56 1.12 .188 2 2 4
11/2 .94 .56 1.12 .188 2 2 4
2 1.12 .62 1.50 .250 2 2 4
3 1.25 .75 1.50 .250 2 2 4
4 1.38 .88 1.75 .250 2 2 5

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
5.18 Disc and Seat Figure 6

Leakage through the seat and disc is not always easy to detect, but
when definitely known to exist, immediate repair is recommended
since delay may permanently damage the disc, seat or both.
The internal repair of gate valves 2" and smaller is usually found to
be uneconomical. However, if a gate valve is disassembled for in-
spection or cleaning, care should be taken when removing the wedge
to note and mark its orientation with respect to the valve body so
that when the wedge is reinserted in the valve, it will have precisely
the same relationship to the seats that it had in the original assembly.
The seat threads in angle, globe, and check valve bodies should be
carefully inspected to make sure they are in useable condition. When
Stem
installing new seats by using proper seat tools, the seats should be
screwed tightly into the valve body, then unscrewed and examined
to make sure they are making continuous contact for tight seal. Bushing
If seating surfaces show galling, slight pitting, grooving, or Disc Nut

indentations not deeper than 0.010", lapping will usually restore the
Disc
surfaces sufficiently to permit tight closure. Defects deeper than
Washer
0.010" can seldom be corrected by lapping, but seating surfaces
can be remachined or new parts installed. For relapping the seat and Seat
disc of Vogt globe, angle, or check valves, use a fine and a coarse
grade emery base compound such as Clover Compound A and D.
Apply a light coat of fine, or A, compound to the seating surface of
the disc or one-piece stem, insert disc or one-piece stem into seat,
and lap using an oscillating motion. Lap a few minutes and then Body
wipe seating surfaces clean. This will clearly show the extent of
damage. If severe damage is noted, use the coarse, or D, compound
and lap until all defects are removed. Then finish with the fine, or A,
compound. It is recommended that the face of the disc be “blued” to Figure 7
check for contact between seating surfaces after final lapping.
Globe and angle valves require a lapping guide fixture to maintain Adapter
alignment during the lapping operation. A fixture as shown in Figure
6 may be made or, for O.S. and Y. valves, a valve bonnet with yoke
nut removed may be used. For relapping loose disc globe valves, Disc
place a washer between the disc and head of the stem and retighten
the disc nut, as shown in Figure 6.
Vogt piston check valves require an adapter to screw or mate into

the piston for lapping the piston seating surface to the seat. The
bore of the valve body serves as a guide for lapping, see Figure 7.
Ball check valves are primarily used for fluids of high viscosity and
the rolling action of the ball maintains seating surfaces in good
condition until ball size or ball guide is worn and replacement parts
are needed.
Body

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
5.19 Gate Valve Maintenance 6. Test the valve and, if acceptable, place valve back in service.
Valve Seat Leaker

Bolted Bonnet Gate Valves
1. Remove the bonnet subassembly. Inspect body, seat rings, gate,
The repair of such valves can be accomplished as follows: and bonnet bolting.
Recommended Spare Parts 2. If the gate is badly damaged it can be replaced. Since Vogt gate
1. Bonnet gasket—See Section 1 for part numbers. Listed or un- valves are selectively assembled with matching gates/seat rings
listed gaskets are available from Flowserve distribution on short a new gate may not correct a leaking valve. New gates are avail-
notice. able from Flowserve distribution on short notice.
2. Packing—See Section 1 for part numbers. Listed or unlisted 3. If the seat rings are damaged, a loose and leaking valve in ser-
gaskets are available from Flowserve distribution on short vice cannot be repaired without removal from the line. Special
notice. equipment will be required to replace the seat rings and replace-
ment of the valve is recommended instead of seat replacement.
a CAUTION In the event the user intends to repair the valve, call Flowserve
1. The system pressure shall be totally isolated and distribution for seat ring part numbers and availability. Such
vented from the valve to ensure that the valve is at parts are available on short notice.
zero pressure while being repaired.
2. For small valves valve replacement may be the most Seal Welded Bonnet Gate Valves
economical way to facilitate repair. The Vogt valves in this category include valves with threaded
bonnets that, once assembled, are seal welded. They contain no
Bonnet Gasket Leaker gaskets. Replacement may be more economical than repair for
1. Remove bonnet. these valves.
2. Clean and Inspect gasket recess and gasket surface on the bon- Bonnet Gasket Leaker
net. Erosion in the gasket seating area greater than 0.030" deep This would be a very unusual event, but if a seal weld leaks, it
will require replacing the valve body and/or bonnet. A machining should be ground out while the valve is not under pressure, and a
allowance of 0.030" is allowed to refurbish the gasket seating weld repair at the point of leakage shall be performed. See Section 4
area of the bonnet and body. for typical weld metal that can be used to weld repair carbon, alloy
and stainless steel valves.
a CAUTION: Ensure that any metal removed from the bot-
tom of the depth of the body gasket recess is duplicated Valve Seat Leaker
by removing the same amount from the top of the body. Replacement instead of repair is recommended. Seat replacement
This is required to ensure that the depth of the gasket will require removal of the valve form the service line. Special
recess (0.095–0.100") in the body is maintained. equipment will be required to replace seat rings. Call Flowserve for
seat ring part numbers and availability. Such parts are available on
The bonnet gasket surface can be machined by up to 0.030" short notice.
without any additional removal. Body/bonnet gasket surface
metal removal will reduce the thickness of body/bonnet
thickness.
5.20 Globe Valve Maintenance
3. Inspect the bonnet bolting to ensure it is proper and bolting is
not damaged or stretched. If bolting is bad it shall be replaced.
Bolted Bonnet Globe Valves
Bolting is available from Flowserve distribution on short notice. The repair of Vogt valves with spiral-wound gasket bonnet joints can
be accomplished as follows:
4. If the gasket surface is not damaged and/or has been refur-
bished, replace the gasket with a gasket part number noted in Recommended Spare Parts
the Recommended Spare Parts Table of Section 1. Gaskets are 1. Bonnet gasket—See Section 1 for part number. Listed gaskets
available from distribution on short notice. are available from Flowserve distribution on short notice.
5. Place the bonnet back on the valve and install the bonnet bolt- 2. Packing—See Section 1 for part number. Listed packing is avail-
ing. Torque the bonnet bolting in accordance with the torque able from Flowserve distribution on short notice.
requirements of Bonnet Torque Requirements of Section 1.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
a CAUTION 3. Note any rust on the body and disc area. Internal rusting may
1. The system pressure shall be totally isolated and cause the valve to close improperly.
vented from the valve to ensure that the valve is at 4. Clean rust from valve.
zero pressure while being repaired.
5. Inspect the valve body seat. If the seat has imperfections deeper
2. For small valves valve replacement may be the most than 0.010", repair may not be economical and may be impos-
economical way to facilitate repair. sible. A replacement body is readily available from Flowserve
distribution on short notice.
Bonnet Gasket Leaker
1. Remove bonnet subassembly. Four or eight bonnet bolts must 6. If the imperfections are less than 0.010", the valve seating
be removed to remove the bonnet subassembly. surfaces can be brought back into like-new seating condition by
lapping the disc to the body seat.
2. Clean and inspect gasket recess and gasket surface on the
bonnet. Erosion in the gasket seating area greater than 0.030" 7. No special lapping tools are required. The bonnet subassembly
deep will require the valve body and/or bonnet to be replaced. A can be modified to serve as a lapping tool. (See Figure 6, Sec-
machining allowance of 0.030" is allowed to refurbish the gasket tion 5.) The packing shall be removed from the bonnet subas-
seating area of the bonnet and/or body. sembly and the yoke nut shall also be removed and/or modified.
8. The disc/disc nut arrangement shall be assembled with an

a CAUTION: Ensure that any metal removed from the
O-ring, or washer as noted in Figure 6, Section 5. This O-ring/
depth of the body gasket recess is duplicated by remov-
washer fixes the disc to the stem and causes it to rotate when
ing the same amount from the top of the body. This is
the stem is rotated.
required to ensure that the depth of the gasket recess
(0.095–0.100") in the body is maintained. 9. The lapping process requires the disc to be rotated against the
body seat with a lapping compound between the two parts. The
The bonnet gasket surface depth can be machined by up to
rotation of the disc can be done manually or with a low speed
0.030" without damage to the valve. Bonnet gasket surface
air tool. Rotation of the piston with an air tool should be on
removal shall be across the full surface of the bonnet that
the order of 40 rpm. Downward force should be limited to the
contacts the gasket and body-mating surface when the valve is
weight of the tool.
assembled. Body or bonnet gasket surface metal removal will
reduce the thickness of body or bonnet thickness by a maxi- 10. For the lapping process, two grades of lapping compounds shall
mum acceptable 0.030". be used. The first lapping (rough) shall be done with the follow-
ing grade of compound:
3. Inspect the bonnet bolting to ensure it is proper and bolting is
not damaged or stretched. If bolting is bad it shall be replaced. Fel Pro
Bolting is available from Flowserve distribution on short notice. Clover Sharpening Compound
Silicon Carbide
4. If the gasket surface is not damaged and/or has been refur-
Water Soluble Gel
bished per the above machining process, replace the gasket
120 grit Part No. 51846 E
with a gasket part number noted in the Recommended Spare
Coarse
Parts List of Section 1. Gaskets are available from Flowserve
distribution on short notice. This compound removes a considerable amount of metal and
should take 3–5 minutes to refurbish the seating surfaces.
5. Place the bonnet subassembly back on the valve and install the
Discontinue when the disc and body have continuous lapping
bonnet bolting. Torque the bonnet bolting in accordance with
lines on the seating surfaces.
the torque requirements of Bonnet Torque Requirements of
Section 5. The final lap shall be done with the following grade of
compound:
6. Test the valve and, if acceptable, place back in service.
Clover Grade 1A
Valve Seat Leaker 320 Grit
1. Remove the bonnet subassembly. Inspect body, disc, and bon- Very Fine
net bolting.
This polishes the seating surface of the disc/body seating
2. If the disc is badly damaged it can be replaced. Discs are avail- surface.
able from Flowserve distribution on short notice.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
The final lap should be 3–5 minutes depending on the appear- 6. Test the valve for seal weld integrity and, if acceptable, place
ance of the lapping line on the piston. Since Vogt globe valves valve back in service.
have a line contact, a continuous lapped line of width 0.040–
7. Persistent leakage may be the result of “cracked hard facing”
0.050" is normal. The lapped body shall have a similar continu-
on the valve body seat. If so, the body and/or valve have to be
ous line. The disc and body that have been lapped to each other
replaced. Cracked hard facing cannot be repaired.
shall be assembled together.
A normal appearance of a properly lapped valve would be as

follows: 5.21 Check Valve Maintenance
The disc would have a continuous black line when it is Bolted Bonnet Piston Lift Check Valves
cleaned of the lapping compound. The lapping compound
above is a water-soluble and can be cleaned with water. The The repair of Vogt valves with spiral-wound gasket bonnet joints can
black line represents the lapped surface. be accomplished as follows:
The body should have a similar continuous black line as Recommended Spare Parts
well of similar width. The lapping compound can be cleaned 1. Bonnet gasket—See Section 1 for part number. Listed gaskets
with water. are available from Flowserve distribution on short notice.
Once the body and disc have a continuous lapped line of con- a CAUTION
tact, the O-ring shall be removed from the stem/disc/disc nut
1. The system pressure shall be totally isolated and
arrangement. The stem/disc/disc nut shall be reassembled. The
vented from the valve to ensure the valve is at zero
disc/disc nut shall be staked per Figure 13, Section 5. This locks
pressure while being repaired.
the disc nut to the disc. Once this is complete the valve can be
reassembled, tested, and placed back in service. 2. For small valves, replacement may be more eco-
nomical than repair.
Seal Welded Bonnet Globe Valves
The valves in this category include valves with threaded bonnets
1. Remove bonnet subassembly. Four or eight bonnet bolts must
that, once assembled, are seal welded. They contain no gaskets.
be removed to remove the bonnet subassembly.
Valve replacement may be more economical than repair for these
valves. 2. Clean and inspect gasket recess and gasket surface on the
bonnet. Erosion in the gasket seating area greater than 0.030"
deep will require the valve body and/or bonnet to be replaced. A
This would be a very unusual event, but if a seal weld leaks, it
machining allowance of 0.030" is allowed to refurbish the gasket
should be ground out while the valve is not under pressure, and a
seating area of the bonnet and/or body.
weld repair at the point of leakage shall be performed. See Section
4 for typical weld metal that can be used to weld repair carbon, alloy a CAUTION: Ensure that any metal removed from the
and stainless steel valves. depth of the body gasket recess is duplicated by remov-
ing the same amount from the top of the body. This is
Valve Seat Leaker
required to ensure that the depth of the gasket recess
1. Remove the seal weld by grinding and/or machining. This will
(0.095–0.100") in the body is maintained.
require removal of the weld metal which will be 1/4" thick at a
minimum.
The bonnet gasket surface depth can be machined by up to
2. Once the seal weld is totally removed, use a pipe or strap 0.030" without damage to the valve. Bonnet gasket surface
wrench to remove the bonnet. removal shall be across the full surface of the bonnet that
contacts the gasket and body-mating surface when the valve is
3. The lapping of the disc to body seat shall be per the previous assembled. Body or bonnet gasket surface metal removal will
procedure. reduce the thickness of body or bonnet thickness by a maxi-
4. Reassemble the bonnet to the valve. mum acceptable 0.030".
5. Test the valve. If acceptable, proceed with replacing the seal 3. Inspect the bonnet bolting to ensure it is proper and bolting is
weld. not damaged or stretched. If bolting is bad it shall be replaced.
Bolting is available from Flowserve distribution on short notice.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
4. If the gasket surface is not damaged and/or has been refur- The final lap shall be done with the following grade of
bished per the above machining process, replace the gasket compound:
with a gasket part number noted in the Recommended Spare
Clover Grade 1A
Parts List of Section 1. Gaskets are available from distribution
320 Grit
on short notice.
Very Fine
5. Place the bonnet subassembly back on the valve and install the
The final lap should be 3–5 minutes depending on the appearance
bonnet bolting. Torque the bonnet bolting in accordance with
of the lapping line on the piston. Since Vogt check valves have a line
the torque requirements of Bonnet Torque Requirements of Sec-
contact, a continuous lapping line of width 0.040–0.050" is normal.
tion 5.
The lapped body shall have a similar continuous line. The piston
6. Test the valve and, if acceptable, place back in service. and body that have been lapped to each other shall be assembled
together.
Valve Seat Leaker
1. Remove the bonnet. Inspect body, bonnet, and bonnet bolting. The normal appearance of a properly lapped valve would be as
follows:
2. Note any rust on the body, piston or disc. Internal rusting may
cause the valve to stick and close improperly. The disc would have a continuous black line when it is cleaned of the
lapping compound. The lapping compound is water-soluble and can
3. Clean rust from valve. be cleaned with water. The black line represents the lapped surface.
4. Inspect the valve seat. If the seat has imperfections deeper than The body should have a similar continuous black line as well, of
0.010", repair may not be economical and may be impossible. similar width. The lapping compound can be cleaned with water.
5. If the imperfections are less than 0.010" the valve seating Once the body and piston have a continuous lapped line of contact,
surfaces can be brought back into like-new seating condition by the valve can be reassembled, tested and placed back in service.
lapping the piston/disc to the body seat.
Bolted Bonnet Ball Check Valves
6. Flowserve has a special lapping tool that will engage the piston
The previous procedures apply except that the lapping of the body
and allow it to be rotated during the lapping process. Tool num-
seat shall be done with a Vogt piston normally used with the valve.
bers are available from Flowserve.
This restores the seat in the valve body. The ball shall be inspected
7. The lapping process requires the piston/disc to be rotated and replaced if it contains any nicks that would cause leakage.
against the body seat with a lapping compound between the two
parts. The rotation of the piston can be done manually or with a Bolted Bonnet Swing Check Valves
low-speed air tool. Rotation of the piston with an air tool should
Bonnet leakers shall be handled per the above. Call Flowserve for
be on the order of 40 rpm. Downward force should be limited to
gasket part numbers. Seat leakers for removable seat valves shall be
the weight of the tool.
corrected as follows:
8. For the lapping process two grades of lapping compounds shall
1. Remove the seats.
be used. The first lapping shall be done with the following grade
of compound: 2. Lap the seats on a flat plate.
Fel Pro 3. Remove the clapper and lap on a flat plate.

Clover Sharpening Compound
4. Reassemble the bonnet subassembly and valve body. Ensure
Silicon Carbide
that the clapper mechanism has the correct orientation to the
Water Soluble Gel
seat. Rotate bonnet slightly to ensure that clapper and seat have
120 grit Part No. 51846 E
good contact.
Coarse
5. Reassemble, test and place back in service.
This compound removes a considerable amount of metal and
should take 3–5 minutes to refurbish the seating surfaces. A persistent leakage may be the result of “cracked hard facing” on
Discontinue when the disc and body have continuous lapping the valve body seat. If so, the body and/or valve have to be replaced.
lines on the seating surfaces. Cracked hard facing cannot be repaired.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
Seal Welded Bonnet Piston Lift Check Valves 2. The actuator has a separate nameplate with details of the actua-
tor. A serial number is normally supplied and this number shall
The valves in this category include those with threaded bonnets that,
be provided to Flowserve when making inquiry.
once assembled, are seal welded. They contain no gaskets.
Bonnet Gasket Leaker Vogt MOV Valve Installation

This would be a very unusual event, but if a seal weld leaks, it The installation of Vogt MOV valves shall be in accordance with the
should be ground out while the valve is not under pressure, and a following procedures:
weld repair at the point of leakage shall be performed. See Section
4 for typical weld metal that can be used to weld repair carbon, alloy 1. General The Vogt MOV valve has been assembled and
and stainless steel valves. performance-tested at the factory. All torque and limit switches
have been set to operate the valve at a seat closure pressure of
Valve Seat Leaker 110 percent of the design pressure for which the actuator was
1. Remove the seal weld by grinding and/or machining. designed. The as-shipped Vogt MOV valve shall be installed and
maintained in accordance with the above reference documents.
2. Once the seal weld is removed, use a pipe or strap wrench to
The Vogt MOV valve is shipped complete with the reference
remove the bonnet.
document package for the appropriate valve actuator. These
3. Lapping of the disc to body seat shall be per the previous documents shall be used for the installation and maintenance of
procedure. the Vogt MOV valve.
4. Reassemble the bonnet to the valve. 2. Storage The Vogt MOV valve shall be stored in accordance
with the applicable Short Term and/or Long Term Storage
5. Test the valve. If acceptable, proceed with replacing the seal
procedures in this manual. Reference document #2 for any
weld.
special storage requirement unique to the valve actuator. The
6. Test the valve for seal weld integrity, and if acceptable, place valve stem opening in the valve actuator has been sealed at the
valve back in service. factory. Other actuator wiring conduit openings in the actuator
have not been disturbed by Flowserve.
3. Welding Vogt MOV socket and butt-welding end valves shall

5.22 Vogt Motor-Operated Valve be installed using the applicable Recommended Installation
(MOV) Installation and Welding Procedures provided in this manual.
4. c WARNING Any change in orientation of the actuator to the

Maintenance Instruction as-shipped valve mounting during field installation, including
References – Vogt MOV Installation And Maintenance Documents removal of the actuator from the valve, voids the actuator limit
switch settings that were set during final performance testing at
1. VVAIM2000—Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual
the factory. In the event the valve operator is removed from the
for Vogt Valves. Shipped with each MOV valve.
valve, the actuator is rotated on the valve, or the bonnet assem-
2. Applicable valve actuator installation and maintenance manual, bly is rotated on the as-shipped valve, all actuator limit switches
shipped with each Vogt MOV valve. Reference documents #1 shall be reset to the actuator drawing limit switch development
and #2 are attached to the actuator. chart noted on Reference document #3. The procedures to set
the limit switches on the actuator are detailed in Reference #2
3. Wiring diagram supplied with each Vogt MOV valve. Located
document. Damage to valve and/or actuator can occur if limit
within the instrument panel of the valve actuator.
switches are not properly set before installation.
Valve Identification 5. Bonnet Gasket/Gate Replacement It is recommended that

The following information shall be provided for the Vogt MOV valve the bonnet gasket be replaced if any disassembly of the valve
when requesting information from Flowserve relating to the valve body/bonnet joint takes place. See Recommended Spare Parts
and/or actuator. for the proper gasket. For MOV gate valves that are selectively
assembled by Flowserve, if the gate is removed from the MOV
1. The valve has a nameplate on the actuator mounting flange that valve place it back in the same valve and in the same orientation
gives the details of the valve, such as pressure class, maximum as it was removed. Failure to follow this practice can lead to
delta pressure, and drawing number. The drawing number shall permanent seating damage of the gate valve.
be used when making inquiry to Flowserve.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
6. Water Entry During installation, all the openings to the actua- Vogt MOV Valve Maintenance
tor shall be maintained to ensure that water does not enter into
Recommended Spare Parts
the actuator electrical control compartment. The valve actuator
1. Bonnet gasket—See Section 1 for part number. Listed gaskets
is most vulnerable to water entry during the electrical wiring
are available from Flowserve distribution on short notice.
stage when wiring conduit openings are left open and subject to
rainfall. In the event water is unintentionally allowed to collect 2. Packing—See Section 1 for part number. Listed packing is avail-
in the electrical compartment of the actuator the valve actuator able from Flowserve distribution on short notice.
manufacturer shall be contacted for maintenance instructions if
not detailed in the maintenance instructions. 3. Actuator—See applicable Installation, Operation and Mainte-
nance Manual supplied with each Vogt MOV valve or request a
7. Valve Or Actuator Field Replacement In the event that the Recommended Spare Parts for Actuators when ordering.
valve is replaced or the valve actuator interfaced with the Vogt
MOV valve at the field job site, all torque and limit switches shall a CAUTION:
be set prior to operating. The torque and limit switch setting
procedure is detailed in Reference #2. Unless otherwise speci- vented from the valve to ensure it is at zero pressure
fied, all Vogt as-shipped MOV valves are torque-seated on the while being repaired.
shutoff seat and limit-seated on the backseat. Failure to do so
can result in severe damage to valve and/or actuator. 2. Consult the reference document #2 for safety pre-
cautions when troubleshooting the actuator.
8. Wiring The installation of the electrical wiring to the actuator
shall be done in accordance with the Reference documents #2
3. For small valves, valve replacement may be the most
and #3.
economical way to facilitate repair. Vogt Valves can
9. Initial Electrical Operation The actuator initial operation and replace the valve that will interface with the existing
setting of torque and limit switches disturbed during valve as- actuator. The valve nameplate gives the drawing num-
sembly installation shall be done in accordance with document ber for the valve. Provide this to the authorized Vogt
#2. Unless otherwise specified, all Vogt as-shipped MOV valves distributor for replacement.
are torque-seated on the shutoff seat and limit-seated on the
Bonnet Leaker/Seat Leaker for Vogt MOV Gate,
backseat. Globe or Angle Valve
1. See the applicable procedure for Gate, Globe or Angle valve
a CAUTION: During the electrical start-up phase, “phase detailed in this manual for repair of bonnet and/or seat leakers.
rotation” of the actuator (electrical motor) is most
critical and, if the actuator rotation is incorrect, serious 2. Stem breakage is common with MOV valves during the early
damage can occur to the valve. Reference document stages of operation. To replace, remove the bonnet, remove the
#2 has instructions on how to check and correct phase broken stem and insert a new stem. Make sure that the broken
rotation. stem is removed from the stem nut in the valve actuator before
replacing the new stem.
10. System Pressurization Once the system is under pressure,
the final setting on the actuator torque switches may need to be 3. Replace the bonnet and torque bonnet bolts to the values noted
adjusted. During performance testing at Flowserve the closing in Section 5 for the appropriate bolting size.
torque switch is set to the lowest level to acceptably pass a 4. Since the bonnet has been removed, the torque and limit
seat test of 110 percent of the pressure for which the actuator switches will have to be reset on the actuator. See Reference
was sized. When in operation, the torque switch may need to document #2 for instructions.
adjusted upward to ensure that the valve is fully closed under
field conditions. Torque switch adjustment shall be performed in 5. After setting the switches, place valve back in operation.
accordance with the instructions in Reference #2.
Actuator Troubleshooting
1. The orientation of the valve may require that the Torque switch
on the actuator be adjusted upon placement in service. The
referenced document shall be consulted to increase/decrease
the torque output of the actuator.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
5.23 Vogt Air-Operated Valve 3. Welding Vogt AOV socket and butt-welding end valves shall
be installed using the applicable Recommended Installation
(AOV) Installation and Welding Procedures provided in this manual.
Maintenance Instruction 4. c WARNING Any change in orientation of the actuator to the

as-shipped valve mounting during field installation, including
References – Vogt AOV Installation and removal of the actuator from the valve, voids the open and
Maintenance Documents closed actuator limit switch settings that were set during
1. VVAIM2000 – Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual final performance testing by Flowserve. In the event the valve
for Vogt Valves. Shipped with each AOV valve. operator is removed from the valve or the actuator is rotated on
the as-shipped valve, reset the limit switch to actuate when the
2. Applicable valve actuator installation and maintenance manual, valve is fully open and fully closed. Removing the air actuator
shipped with each Vogt AOV valve. Reference documents #1 from the Vogt AOV also violates the valve stem/actuator
and #2 are attached to the actuator. coupling nut thread engagement and can cause the valve to
not fully close. The stem/actuator coupling nut final assembled
3. Actuator accessories manuals. Examples—positioner, limit
thread engagement geometry must be duplicated on reassembly
switch, solenoid valve, etc., manuals.
of the actuator to the valve, otherwise the valve will not fully
Valve Identification close when valve closure signal is given or the full thrust of the
The following information shall be provided for the Vogt AOV valve actuator on the stem may damage the stem or actuator coupling
when requesting information from Flowserve relating to the valve engagement threads.
and/or actuator.
5. Valve Stem/Actuator Coupling Nut Adjustment When the
1. The Vogt AOV valve has a nameplate on the actuator-mounting actuator is removed from the valve, the closure mechanism of
flange that gives the details of the valve, such as pressure class, the valve has been altered from the as-shipped condition. The
maximum delta pressure, and drawing number. The drawing valve stem and coupling nut are designed to permit the stem
number shall be used when making inquiry to Flowserve. to be adjusted to ensure that the actuator actually preloads the
stem and closure mechanism on closure to ensure the valve
2. The actuator has a separate nameplate with details of the actua-
does not leak. In the event the actuator closes the valve but the
tor. A serial number is normally supplied and this number shall
valve continues to pass flow, the stem needs to be lengthened
be provided to Flowserve when making inquiries.
by adjusting the stem and/or the coupling nut in order to ensure
that the actuator has placed enough preload on the closure
Vogt AOV Valve Installation mechanism, (spring force for fail-closed valves or air pressure
The installation of Vogt AOV valves shall be in accordance with the for fail-open valves) to seat the valve against the design pressure.
following procedures:
6. Bonnet Gasket/gate Replacement It is recommended that
1. General The Vogt AOV valve has been assembled and perfor- the bonnet gasket be replaced if any disassembly of the valve
mance-tested at the factory. All applicable open and closed limit body/bonnet joint takes place. See Section 1 for the proper
switches have been set to actuate during opening and closing gasket. For AOV gate valves, that are selectively assembled by
of the valve. The Vogt AOV valve has been performance-tested Flowserve, if the gate is removed from the AOV valve, place it
at a seat closure pressure of 110 percent of the design pressure back on the same valve and in the same orientation as it was
for which the actuator was designed. The as-shipped Vogt AOV removed. Failure to follow this practice can lead to permanent
valve shall be installed and maintained in accordance with the seating damage of the gate valve.
reference documents. The Vogt AOV valve is shipped complete
7. Valve Or Actuator Field Replacement In the event that the
with the reference document package for the appropriate valve
valve is replaced or the valve actuator is interfaced with the Vogt
actuator. These documents shall be used for the installation and
MOV valve at the field job site, set the open and closed limit
maintenance of the Vogt AOV valve.
switches prior to operating. The open and close limit switch
2. Storage The Vogt AOV valve shall be stored in accordance setting procedure is typically done as follows:
with the Short-Term and/or Long-Term Storage Procedures in
a. Close Switch: Stroke the valve to the fully closed position by
this manual. Refer to the Reference document #2 for any special
application of an air supply for “spring-to-open” actuators.
storage requirement unique to the valve actuator.
With the air applied to the actuator, the close limit switch

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
actuator arm shall be adjusted to cause the close switch to a CAUTION:

trip in the closed position. For “spring-to-close” actuators,
the air supply to actuator shall be vented and the spring
vented from the valve and supply pressure removed
allowed to close the valve. The close switch actuator arm
from the actuator when the valve is being repaired.
shall be adjusted to cause the switch to trip.
2. Consult Reference document #2 for safety
b. Open Switch: Stroke the valve to the fully open position by
precautions when troubleshooting the actuator.
application of an air supply for “spring-to-close” actuators.
With the air applied to the actuator, the open limit switch ac- 3. For small valves, replacement may be more
tuator arm shall be adjusted to cause the open switch to trip economical than repair. Vogt Valves can replace the
in the fully open position. For “spring-to-open” actuators, valve with one that will interface with the existing
the air supply to actuator shall be vented and the spring al- actuator. The valve nameplate gives the drawing
lowed to open the valve. The close switch actuator arm shall number for the valve. Provide this to the authorized
be adjusted to cause the switch to trip. Vogt distributor for replacement.
c. Final Cycling: Following the setting of the open and closed Bonnet Leaker/Seat Leaker for Vogt AOV Gate,
switches, the actuator shall be fully closed and opened to Globe or Angle Valve
ensure the limit switches trip as required. 1. See the applicable procedure for Gate, Globe or Angle valve
detailed in this manual for repair of bonnet and/or seat leaker.
8. System Pressurization Once the system is under pressure,
the stem/actuator coupling nut thread engagement may need 2. Stem breakage is common with AOV valves during the early
further adjustment. During performance testing at Flowserve, stages of operation. To replace the stem, it is recommended that
the stem/coupling nut thread engagement is set to a level to the bonnet be removed and the old stem be replaced. Please
acceptably pass a seat test of 110 percent of the pressure for note the length of the old stem and new stem and the thread
which the actuator was sized. (See #5 above.) engagement geometry of the valve stem and actuator coupling
nut. Make sure that the broken stem is totally removed from
9. Supply Pressure
the actuator coupling nut before replacing the new stem. If the
stems are the same length, make every effort to duplicate the
a CAUTION: The actuator nameplate contains a “Maximum
stem and actuator coupling nut engagement geometry noted
Air Supply” that should be used. In the event the actuator
before old stem was removed. This will ensure that the final
is not supplied with a supply air regulator to make this
stem/actuator coupling nut thread engagement adjustment will
adjustment, it is the responsibility of the end-user to
be kept to a minimum.
provide an air supply regulator. Over-pressurization of
the actuator can damage the unit, requiring major repair. 3. For an AOV gate valve, the gate orientation shall be noted and
marked with the body to ensure that the same gate goes back
10. Accessories Accessories for the air actuators shall be sup- into the same valve in the same orientation as it was when it
plied with the Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual was removed.
applicable to each unit.
4. Replace the bonnet and torque bonnet bolts to the values noted
Vogt AOV Valve Maintenance in Section 5 for the appropriate bolting size.
Recommended Spare Parts 5. After resetting the open and close switches, place valve back in
1. Bonnet gasket—See Section 1 for part number. Listed gaskets operation.
are available from Flowserve distribution on short notice.
Actuator Troubleshooting
2. Packing—See Section 1 for part number. Listed packing is avail-
able from Flowserve distribution on short notice. The orientation of the valve may require that the stem/actuator cou-
pling nut have an additional adjustment before the valve is placed
3. Actuator—See applicable Installation, Operations and Main- back in service. If the valve is leaking across the closure seat, an
tenance Manual supplied with each Vogt AOV valve. It is adjustment is necessary for a “fail-closed” valve and/or an increase
recommended that Recommended Spare Parts for Actuators be in supply pressure if the valve is a “fail-open” design.
requested when ordering a Vogt AOV valve.
For air actuator accessories, separate manuals may have to be
consulted to properly troubleshoot any issues.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
5.24 Vogt Valve Globe/Angle Valves, O. S. and Y. Design (Figure 4)

With one exception, Vogt Globe Valves have one point of lubrication:
Lubrication Points the stem/yoke nut threads. The one exception is the Vogt Series
810, 811 and 822 valves, which shall be lubricated per the Gate
Recommended Lubricant Valve instruction #3 above. Lubricate globe valves as follows:
Flowserve recommends a high-pressure and temperature lubricant
1. For those Vogt Globe Valves with a grease fitting (Figure 9),
such as Dow Corning Molykote™ G-N Paste or similar.
lubricate through the fitting.
Gate Valves, O.S. and Y. Design (Figures 8-12)
2. For those Vogt Globe Valves with no grease fitting (Figure 8)
There are two points to be lubricated for Vogt Gate Valves, the stem/
open the valve to mid-stroke and brush lubricant on the stem
yoke nut threads and the yoke nut/bearing ring area. Lubricate as
thread both above and below the yoke nut. Fully opening and
follows:
closing the valve will lubricate the stem threads.
1. For those Vogt Gate Valves with a single grease fitting (figure 9),
Gate/Globe/Angle Valves, Inside Screw Stem (ISS) Design
note that lubricating through this fitting only reached one of the
These valves have no lubrication points. They shall be used in ap-
lubrication points, which is the yoke nut/ bearing ring area. The
plications in which the service fluids lubricate the valve.
stem and yoke nut threads shall be lubricated as noted in (3)
below. Check Valves, All Vogt Types
These valves have no lubrication points.
2. For those valves with double grease fittings (figure 10) both
lubrication points can be reached through these fittings. Both Motor-Operated Gate/Globe/Angle Valves
fittings must be used to lubricate the two points. These valves are supplied with an actuator that includes a thrust
3. For those Vogt Gate Valves with no grease fitting (figure 8), base with mating stem nut. There is only one lubrication point,
lubricate the two reached points as follows: the stem thread/actuator stem nut. To lubricate the stem thread,
proceed as follows:
a) Open the valve to mid-stroke. Brush lubricant on the stem
thread that protrudes through the handwheel and on the Using the actuator, fully open the valve. Remove the plug from the
stem thread under the yoke. Fully open and close the valve. top side of the actuator, and use a long brush inserted through the
The stem/yoke thread is now lubricated. actuator opening to brush lubricant onto the valve stem threads.
Stroke the valve closed. The stem thread is now lubricated. Replace
b) Open the valve slightly, this creates a clearance at the bear- the pipe plug back into the actuator opening.
ing ring area. Liberally brush lubricant on the bearing ring
area. Close the valve. This distributes the lubricant to the Lubrication of the actuator shall be done in accordance with the
bearing ring and the outside diameter area of the yoke nut. maintenance provisions in the actuator manual.
Note: The approach detailed in #3 can also be used for

those Vogt Gate Valves with a single or double grease fit-
ting, at the option of the end-user.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
Figure 8 – Gate Valve Top Works (no grease fitting) Figure 9 – Gate Valve Top Works (single grease fitting)
Lubrication
Points
Lubrication
Points
Figure 10 – API-600 Gate Valve Top Works (double grease fittings) Figure 11 – Globe Valve Top Works (no grease fitting)
Lubrication
Lubrication Points
Points

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
Figure 12 – Globe Valve (single grease fitting) Figure 11Figure

- Globe
13 –Valve
Globe Stacked Disc
Valve Staked Disc
Lubrication
Points
Center punch disc nut

to lock disc nut to disc
Displaced metal
in notch
5.25 Engineering Information

Check Valve Cracking/Opening Pressures
(Vogt Valve Series 701, 15701, 573, 583, 593, etc.) Maximum Packing Gland Bolting Torque (ft-lb)
Size, NPS Pressure (psi) Class 150, 300, Class 600
Size, 600 & 800 & 800 Class 1500
1/2 0.61
NPS Conventional Port Full Port Class 1500 Full Port
3/4 0.61
1/2 1.8 1.8 4.2 4.2
1 0.52
3/4 1.8 3.7 4.2 7.5
11/4 0.57
1 3.7 4.0 7.5 13.9
11/2 0.57
11/4 4.0 — 13.9 13.9
2 0.58
11/2 4.0 7.5 13.9 15.9
2 7.5 8.5 15.9 —
21/2 8.5 — — —
3 8.5 — — —
4 12.0 — — —

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
Maximum Handwheel Closing Torques, Typical (ft-lb)*

Size, Class 800 Conventional Class 800 Full Port Class 1500 Conventional Class 1500 Full Port Class 2500 Full Port
NPS Port Gate Valve Gate Valve Port Gate Valve Gate Valve Gate Valve
1/4" 8 — — — —
/
3 8" 8 — — — —
1/2" 15 15 25 25 30
3/4" 15 20 25 35 75
1" 20 40 35 55 75
11/4" 50 50 75 75 —
11/2" 50 70 75 115 175
2" 70 100 115 — 175
*Torque based on valve pressure rating at 100°F.
Maximum Handwheel Closing Torques, Typical (ft-lb)*

Size, Class 800 Conventional Class 800 Full Port Class 1500 Conventional Class 1690 Conventional Class 2680 Full Port
NPS Port Globe Valve Globe Valve Port Globe Valve Port Globe Valve (1) Globe Valve (1)
1/2" 15 15 25 25 30
3/4" 15 30 25 25 75
1" 30 40 35 40 75
11/4" — — 60 — —
11/2" 40 75 60 125 175
2" 75 125 100 125 175
*Torque based on valve pressure rating at 100°F.
The NPS 1.5 and 2 have hammer blow-type handwheels.
(1)
Recommended Maximum Bonnet Bolt Torques

(Dry, Unlubricated Values)
Torque (ft-lb) Torque (ft-lb)
Bolt Diameter B7 & B16 B8M
/
5 16" 25 22
/
3 8" 40 36
/
7 16" 50 45
1/2" 85 75
/
9 16" 144 130
/
5 8" 125 115
3/4" 175 156
/
7 8" 530 480
1" 795 710
Note: Reduce above values by 25 percent to 30 percent if any type of lubrication
is used on bolting.

Flow Control
Vogt Valves

Flow Control
Vogt Valves

Flow Control
Vogt Valves
Flowserve Corporation has established industry leadership in the design and manufacture of its products. When properly selected, this Flowserve product is designed to perform
its intended function safely during its useful life. However, the purchaser or user of Flowserve products should be aware that Flowserve products might be used in numerous
applications under a wide variety of industrial service conditions. Although Flowserve can (and often does) provide general guidelines, it cannot provide specific data and warnings
for all possible applications. The purchaser/user must therefore assume the ultimate responsibility for the proper sizing and selection, installation, operation, and maintenance of
Flowserve products. The purchaser/user should read and understand the Installation Operation Maintenance (IOM) instructions included with the product, and train its employees
and contractors in the safe use of Flowserve products in connection with the specific application.
While the information and specifications contained in this literature are believed to be accurate, they are supplied for informative purposes only and should not be considered
certified or as a guarantee of satisfactory results by reliance thereon. Nothing contained herein is to be construed as a warranty or guarantee, express or implied, regarding any
matter with respect to this product. Because Flowserve is continually improving and upgrading its product design, the specifications, dimensions and information contained herein
are subject to change without notice. Should any question arise concerning these provisions, the purchaser/user should contact Flowserve Corporation at any one of its worldwide
operations or offices.
For more information about Flowserve Corporation, visit www.flowserve.com or call USA 1-800-225-6989.
Flowserve Flow Control

Vogt Valves
1511 Jefferson Street
Sulphur Springs, TX 75482
Phone: 903-885-3151
Fax: 903-439-3386
© 2011 Flowserve Corporation, Irving, Texas, USA. Flowserve is a registered trademark of Flowserve Corporation. FCD VVENIM2000-02 05/09 Printed in USA.
13
Instruction Manual
For
4.6 – Rotary Valve Position Indicator
Tab 14

Copes-Vulcan

TDV - Manual Assy Rev.3!18!09

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TDV - Manual Assy Rev.3!18!09

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Page 1 of 1 00

THERMAL DRAIN VALVE

Clyde Bergemann, Inc.

Section Page No.

3.6 Solenoid Valve Tab 6

Section 1 – Basic Description

Section 2 – System Overview

Option Description CBI Part No.

2.2 Major Components

2.3 Operational Philosophy

2.3.2 PLC Operated System

2.4 System Installation

2.5 Temperature Set Point

2.6 System Requirements

2.7 Spare Parts

SECTION DIVIDER PAGE

3.1 – Thermal Drain Valve

Not affiliated with Copes-Vulcan Inc. Copes-

If you have a condensate problem there are many issues that

Engineering Studies can be completed

1. 1 ea. - Thermal Drain Valve

As an alternate the stand-alone system would consist of the

1. 1 ea. – Thermal Drain Valve with Electronics Package.

Thermal Drain Valve System

PLC Operated Stand Alone

Item CBI Part No. Item CBI Part No.

Drain Valve Specifications

Clyde Bergemann, Inc. 4015 Presidential Parkway, Atlanta, GA 30340-3707 USA

SECTION DIVIDER PAGE

Not affiliated with Copes-Vulcan Inc. Copes-

Series Z1 Unibody Power Valve

Their Options Are Our Standards

At Global Flow Technologies, formerly Zy-Tech, we are committed to improving our

clients’ operational and financial performance by supplying the most comprehensive

PBV® Severe Service Ball Valve Certification

Union Tech Company, Inc. meets or exceeds all requirements

Introduction & How To Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

PBV® Severe Service Ball Valve Solutions

PBV® Severe Service Ball Valves • How To Order

Specifying PBV® Metal Seated Severe Service Valve Figure Numbers

.75 x .65 3/4 Z1 10 5 36 C 1 1 A 4 0 6

Scribe Line on Stem ISO Universal

Live-Loaded Stem Packing

Dependable Performance For All of Your Power Applications

D End Configuration Dimensions

Parts & Materials

Live-Loaded ISO Universal

Blowout Proof In-house CNC Machining

Ball and Seat Spring Loaded

HVOF Chrome Carbide Metal-to-Metal Sealing

Two-Piece Design Ball and Seats are

Rugged Design For All of Your Industrial Applications

Class 150 Dimensional Data

Class 300 Dimensional Data

Class 600 Dimensional Data Class 900 Dimensional Data

Class 1500 Dimensional Data Class 2500 Dimensional Data

Parts & Materials

ISO Universal Mounting Standard Handle for Manual

Live-Loaded Stem Packing Variety of End Connection

Blowout Proof Mate Lapped Ball and

Rugged Design For All of Your Industrial Applications

Series Z1 • Flow Coefficients (Cv)

Series Z2 • Flow Coefficients (Cv)